path: root/ekdosis.dtx

% \iffalse meta-comment
% 
% ekdosis -- Typesetting TEI xml compliant critical editions
% Copyright (C) 2020  Robert Alessi
% 
% Please send error reports and suggestions for improvements to Robert
% Alessi <alessi@robertalessi.net>
% 
% This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
% it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
% the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
% (at your option) any later version.
% 
% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
% General Public License for more details.
% 
% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
% along with this program.  If not, see
% <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
% 
%<*internal>
\iffalse
%</internal>
%<*luapre>
--[[
This file is part of the `ekdosis' package

ekdosis -- Typesetting TEI xml compliant critical editions
Copyright (C) 2020  Robert Alessi

Please send error reports and suggestions for improvements to Robert
Alessi <alessi@robertalessi.net>

This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
(at your option) any later version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program.  If not, see
<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
--]]

%</luapre>
%<*internal>
\fi
%</internal>
% \fi
%
% \iffalse
%<*driver>
\ProvidesFile{ekdosis.dtx}
%</driver>
%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
%<package>\ProvidesPackage{ekdosis}
%<*package>
    [2020/08/14 v1.0 Typesetting TEI xml compliant critical editions]
%</package>
%<*driver>
\begin{filecontents}[noheader,overwrite]{bibdata.xml}
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<listBibl xmlns="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0">
  <biblStruct type="book" xml:id="ReynoldsWilson1991">
    <monogr>
      <title level="m">Scribes and Scholars</title>
      <author>
        <forename>L. D.</forename>
        <surname>Reynolds</surname>
      </author>
      <author>
        <forename>N. G.</forename>
        <surname>Wilson</surname>
      </author>
      <edition>3</edition>
      <imprint>
        <pubPlace>Oxford</pubPlace>
        <publisher>Clarendon Press</publisher>
        <date>1991</date>
      </imprint>
    </monogr>
  </biblStruct>
</listBibl>
\end{filecontents}
\begin{filecontents}[overwrite]{\jobname.bib}
@Article{Alessi2020,
  author =	 {Alessi, Robert},
  title =	 {ekdosis: Using Lua\LaTeX{} for Producing \texttt{TEI
                  xml} Compliant Critical Editions and Highlighting
                  Parallel Writings},
  journaltitle = {Journal of Data Mining and Digital Humanities},
  date =	 2020,
  pubstate =	 {submitted},
  issuetitle =   {Collecting, Preserving, and Disseminating Endangered
                  Cultural Heritage for New Understandings through
                  Multilingual Approaches},
  eprinttype =	 {hal},
  eprint =	 {hal-02779803}
}

@Book{Caesar-BG-v2,
  author =	 {{Caesar}},
  title =	 {Gallic War},
  origtitle =	 {Guerre des Gaules},
  date =	 1987,
  origdate =	 1926,
  editor =	 {Constans, L.-A.},
  volume =	 2,
  pagination =	 {none},
  series =	 {Collection des Universités de France},
  publisher =	 {Les Belles Lettres},
  location =	 {Paris}
}

@Book{CaesarTr,
  author = 	 {{Caesar}},
  title = 	 {Gallic War},
  date =	 1869,
  editor =	 {McDevitte, W. A., and Bohn, W. S.},
  edition =	 1,
  series =	 {Harper's New Classical Library},
  publisher =	 {Harper \& Brothers},
  location =	 {New York}}

@Book{ReynoldsWilson1991,
  author =	 {Reynolds, L. D. and Wilson, N. G},
  title =	 {Scribes and Scholars},
  year =	 {1991},
  subtitle =	 {A Guide to the Translation of Greek and Latin
                  Literature},
  edition =	 {3},
  publisher =	 {Clarendon Press},
  location =	 {Oxford}
}

@Online{DLL-TC,
  author =	 {{Digital Latin Library}},
  title =	 {Textual Criticism},
  url =
  {https://digitallatin.org/library-digital-latin-texts/textual-criticism},
  urldate =	 {2020-05-24}
}

@Online{Mastronarde.Tarrant2017,
  author =	 {Mastronarde, Donald J. and Tarrant, Richard J.},
  title =	 {Review: Guidelines for Encoding Critical Editions
                  for the Library of Digital Latin Texts},
  date =	 {2017-12-04},
  url =
  {https://classicalstudies.org/scs-blog/donald-j-mastronarde/review-guidelines-encoding-critical-editions-library-digital-latin},
  organization = {Society for Classical Studies}
}

@Online{TBE,
  author =	 {Van den Branden, Ron and Terras, Melissa and
                  Vanhoutte, Edward},
  title =	 {TEI by Example},
  urldate =	 {2020-08-04},
  url =		 {http://www.teibyexample.org}
}

@Software{lineno,
  title =	 {The Lineno package},
  titleaddon =	 {Line numbers on paragraphs},
  author =	 {Lück, Uwe and Böttcher, Stephan},
  url =		 {http://www.ctan.org/pkg/lineno},
  date =	 {2005-11-02},
  version =	 {4.41}
}

@Software{polyglossia,
  title =	 {The Polyglossia package},
  titleaddon =	 {An alternative to babel for XeLaTeX and LuaLaTeX},
  author =	 {Charette, François and Reutenauer, Arthur},
  url =		 {http://www.ctan.org/pkg/polyglossia},
  date =	 {2020-04-08},
  version =	 {1.49}
}

@Software{babel,
  title =	 {The Babel package},
  titleaddon =	 {Multilingual support for Plain TeX or LaTeX},
  author =	 {Bezos López, Javier and Braams, Johannes L.},
  url =		 {http://www.ctan.org/pkg/babel},
  date =	 {2020-07-13},
  version =	 {3.47}
}

@Software{arabluatex,
  title =	 {The Arabluatex package},
  titleaddon =	 {ArabTeX for LuaLaTeX},
  author =	 {Alessi, Robert},
  url =		 {http://ctan.org/pkg/arabluatex},
  date =	 {2020-03-23},
  version =	 {1.20}
}

@Software{icite,
  title =	 {The Icite package},
  subtitle =	 {Indices locorum citatorum},
  author =	 {Alessi, Robert},
  url =		 {http://ctan.org/pkg/icite},
  date =	 {2020-03-05},
  version =	 {1.3a}
}

@Software{arabtex,
  title =	 {The Arabtex package},
  titleaddon =	 {Macros and fonts for typesetting Arabic},
  author =	 {Lagally, Klaus},
  url =
  {http://baobab.informatik.uni-stuttgart.de/ifi/bs/research/arab_e.html},
  date =	 {2004-03-11},
  version =	 {4.00}
}
\end{filecontents}
\begin{filecontents}[overwrite]{\jobname-cfg.tex}
\footnotelayout{m}
\DeclareApparatus{fontium}[
        delim=\hskip0.75em,
        bhook=\textbf{Sources:},
        ehook=.]
\DeclareApparatus{default}[
        delim=\hskip0.75em,
        ehook=.]
\DeclareApparatus{ltr}[
        delim=\hskip0.75em]
\DeclareApparatus{rtl}[
        direction=RL,
        sep={[ },
        delim=\hskip0.75em]
\DeclareWitness{M}{M}{\emph{Marcianus Gr.} 269}[
        settlement=Venice,
        institution=Marciana Library,
        msName=Marcianus Gr.,
        idno=269,
        origDate=s. X]
\DeclareHand{M1}{M}{M\textsuperscript{1}}[Emendatio scribae ipsius]
\DeclareHand{M2}{M}{M\textsuperscript{2}}[Manus posterior]
% Peter and John Story:
\DeclareWitness{pjA}{A}{Manuscript A Call No 123}
\DeclareWitness{pjB}{B}{Manuscript B Call No 456}
% Caesar's Gallic War:
\DeclareWitness{cA}{A}{\emph{Bongarsianus} 81}[
               msName=Bongarsianus,
               settlement=Amsterdam,
               idno=81,
               institution=University Library,
               origDate=s. IX--X]
\DeclareHand{cA1}{cA}{A\textsuperscript{1}}[\emph{Emendationes
               scribae ipsius}]
\DeclareWitness{cM}{M}{\emph{Parisinus Lat.} 5056}[
               origDate={s. XII}]
\DeclareWitness{cB}{B}{\emph{Parisinus Lat.} 5763}[
               origDate={s. IX--X}]
\DeclareWitness{cR}{R}{\emph{Vaticanus Lat.} 3864}[
               origDate={s. X}]
\DeclareWitness{cS}{S}{\emph{Laurentianus} R 33}[
               origDate={s. X}]
\DeclareWitness{cL}{L}{\emph{Londinensis} Br. Mus. 10084}[
               origDate={s. XI}]
\DeclareWitness{cN}{N}{\emph{Neapolitanus} IV, c. 11}[
               origDate={s. XII}]
\DeclareWitness{cT}{T}{\emph{Parisinus Lat.} 5764}[
               origDate={s. XI}]
\DeclareWitness{cf}{\emph{f}}{\emph{Vindobonensis} 95}[
               origDate={s. XII}]
\DeclareWitness{cU}{U}{\emph{Vaticanus Lat.} 3324}[
               origDate={s. XI}]
\DeclareWitness{cl}{\emph{l}}{\emph{Laurentianus} Riccard. 541}[
               origDate={s. XI--XII}]
\DeclareShorthand{ca}{α}{cA,cM,cB,cR,cS,cL,cN}
\DeclareShorthand{cb}{β}{cT,cf,cU,cl}
% Hippocrates Epidemics, Book 2:
\DeclareWitness{hV}{V}{\emph{Vaticanus Gr.} 276}
\DeclareWitness{hI}{I}{\emph{Parisinus Gr.} 2140}
\DeclareWitness{hR}{R}{\emph{Vaticanus Gr.} 277}
\DeclareWitness{hH}{H}{\emph{Parisinus Gr.} 2142}
% Silius Italicus' Punica, IX, 30--2:
\DeclareWitness{sL}{L}{Laurentianus, plut, XXXVII, cod. 16}[
                      origDate=s. XV]
\DeclareWitness{sF}{F}{Florentianus, Bibl. Aed. Fl. Eccl. CXCVI}[
                      origDate=s. XV]                      
\DeclareWitness{sO}{O}{Oxoniensis Collegii Reginensis CCCXIV}[
                      origDate=s. XV]                      
\DeclareWitness{sV}{V}{Vaticanus lat. 1652}[
                      origDate=s. XV]
\DeclareScholar{sDrak}{\emph{Drakenborch}}
\end{filecontents}
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
 %\usepackage[letterpaper,margin=25mm,left=50mm,nohead]{geometry}
\usepackage[letterpaper,margin=1.25in,left=50mm,nohead]{geometry}
\usepackage{dox}
\doxitem{Option}{option}{options}
\usepackage{microtype}
\usepackage[no-math]{fontspec}
\usepackage[latin.classic,greek.ancient,american]{babel}
\babelfont{rm}[
   SlantedFont={Old Standard},
   SlantedFeatures={FakeSlant=0.25},
   BoldSlantedFont={Old Standard},
   BoldSlantedFeatures={FakeBold=1.5,FakeSlant=0.25}]{Old Standard}
\babelfont{sf}{NewComputerModern Sans}
\babelfont{tt}{NewComputerModern Mono}
\babelfont[greek]{rm}[
   Script=Greek, RawFeature={+ss05;+ss06},
   SlantedFont={Old Standard},
   SlantedFeatures={FakeSlant=0.25},
   BoldSlantedFont={Old Standard},
   BoldSlantedFeatures={FakeBold=1.5,FakeSlant=0.25}]{Old Standard}
\babelfont[greek]{sf}[Script=Greek]{NewComputerModern Sans}
\babelfont[greek]{tt}[Script=Greek]{NewComputerModern Mono}
\babeltags{ancientgreek = greek}
\def\sg#1{\textancientgreek{#1}}
\usepackage[Old Standard]{mathfont}
\usepackage{arabluatex}
\usepackage[parnotes=roman,teiexport=tidy]{ekdosis}
\input{ekdosis-cfg}
\SetxmlBibResource{bibdata}
\usepackage{booktabs}
\usepackage{xltabular}
\usepackage[prevent-all]{widows-and-orphans}
\usepackage[shortcuts,nospacearound]{extdash}
\usepackage[american]{isodate}
\usepackage{nextpage}
\usepackage{spacingtricks}
\usepackage{csquotes}
\usepackage{relsize}
\usepackage{enumitem}
\setlist{nosep}
\setlist[itemize]{label=\textendash}
\setlist[enumerate,1]{label=(\alph*)}
\newlist{remarks}{enumerate}{10}
\setlist[remarks]{
  label*=\textsc{Rem.} \arabic*,
  left=0.25in,
  before=\smaller}
\usepackage{manfnt}
\usepackage{lettrine}
\newcommand\danger{\lettrine[loversize=-.5]{\textdbend}{\hskip6pt}}
\usepackage{metalogox}
\usepackage{hologo}
\usepackage{xcolor}
\newbool{nocolordoc}
\definecolor{ekdcolor}{RGB}{243,241,235}
\definecolor{cinnamon}{rgb}{0.82, 0.41, 0.12}
\ifbool{nocolordoc}{
  \colorlet{ekdcolor}{white}
  \colorlet{cinnamon}{black}}{}
\definecolor{gainsboro}{RGB}{222,222,222}
\PassOptionsToPackage{bookmarks=true}{hyperref}
\usepackage{xurl}
\usepackage[numbered]{hypdoc}
\usepackage[loadlang=en]{metastr}
\hypersetup{
  colorlinks,
  allcolors=cinnamon,
  linktocpage=true,
  pdftype={Text}
}
\usepackage{uri}
\labelformat{section}{sect.~#1}
\labelformat{subsection}{sect.~#1}
\labelformat{subsubsection}{sect.~#1}
\labelformat{figure}{fig.~#1}
\newcounter{dummy}
\newcommand{\dummy}{\refstepcounter{dummy}}
\usepackage[defaultindex=none,citecmd=autocite]{icite}
\bibinput{ekdosis}
\usepackage[nospace,american]{varioref}
\usepackage[style=oxnotes-inote,dashed]{biblatex}
\DeclareSourcemap{
    \maps[datatype=bibtex]{
      \map{
        \step[fieldsource=issuetitle]
        \step[fieldset=journalsubtitle,origfieldval]
    }
  }
}
\ifbool{nocolordoc}
{
  \usepackage{fontawesome}
  \def\oasymbol{\faUnlock}
  \usepackage{biblatex-ext-oa}
}
{\usepackage[symbolpackage=tikz]{biblatex-ext-oa}}
\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{nametitledelim}{\addcomma\space}
\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{innametitledelim}{\addcomma\space}
\renewcommand*\newunitpunct{\addcomma\space}
\newcommand*{\halurl}[1]{http://hal.archives-ouvertes.fr/#1}
\DeclareFieldFormat{eprint:hal}{%
  \ifhyperref
    {\href{\halurl{#1}}{hal:~\nolinkurl{#1}}}
    {hal:~\nolinkurl{#1}}}
\DeclareFieldAlias{eprint:HAL}{eprint:hal}
\DeclareOpenAccessEprintUrl[always]{hal}{%
  http://hal.archives-ouvertes.fr/\thefield{eprint}}
\DeclareOpenAccessEprintAlias{HAL}{hal}
\addbibresource{ekdosis.bib}
\metaset{titletext}{%
  \metapick[#1]{title}%
  \metacompose[#1]{subtitle}{\metaget[sep]{subtitle}}{}{}}
\metaset[print]{titletext}{%
  \metatitleline[print]{title}%
  \metatitleline[print]{subtitle}%
  \metatitleline[print]{author}%
  \metatitleline[print]{contactemail}%
  \metatitlelinetwo[print]{date}[print]{draft}}
\metaset[skip]{subtitle}{\vspace{1ex}}
\metaset[skip]{author}{\vspace{2ex}}
\metaset[skip]{date}{\vspace{1ex}}
\metaset[style]{title}{\LARGE}
\metaset[style]{author}{\large}
\metaset[sep]{draft}{ -- }
\metasetlang{en-US}
\metaset{title}{ἔκδοσις}
\metaset{date}{\filedate}
\metaset{draft}{\fileversion}
\metaset{subject}{TEI xml compliant critical editions}
\metaset{subtitle}{Typesetting TEI xml Compliant Critical Editions}
\metaset[print]{subtitle}{Typesetting \texttt{TEI xml} Compliant
  Critical Editions}
\metaset{author}{Robert Alessi}
\metaset{keywords}{LaTeX, Lua, TEI xml, multilingual critical
  editions, alignment, segmentation}
\metaset{contactemail}{alessi@roberalessi.net}
\metaset[print]{contactemail}{\mailto[ekdosis]{alessi@robertalessi.net}}
\metaset{contacturl}{http://www.roberalessi.net}
\metaset{partof}{The ekdosis Package}
\metaset[print]{partof}{The \textsf{ekdosis} Package}
\metaset{copyrightowner}{\metapick[#1]{author}}
\metaset{copyrightdate}{2020}
\metaset{licensemessage}{Permission is granted to copy, distribute
  and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free
  Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by
  the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no
  Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license
  is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation
  License''.}
\metaset{licenseurl}{https://www.gnu.org/licenses/fdl-1.3.html}
\metaset[print]{licenseurl}{%
  \url{https://www.gnu.org/licenses/fdl-1.3.html}}
\metaset[cmd]{licenselogo}{\includegraphics[scale=0.75]{#1}}
\metawritepdfinfo
\metawritepdfaux
\metawritepdfpreamble
\metawritepdfcontact
\metawritepdfrights
\usepackage{multicol}
\setlength\IndexMin{100pt}
\usepackage{tocloft}
\newlistof{listing}{lol}{List of listings}
\renewcommand\cfttocprehook{\begin{multicols}{2}}
\renewcommand\cfttocposthook{\end{multicols}}
\renewcommand\cfttoctitlefont{\Large\bfseries}
\renewcommand\cftlolprehook{\begin{multicols}{2}}
\renewcommand\cftlolposthook{\end{multicols}}
\renewcommand\cftloltitlefont{\Large\bfseries}
\usepackage{units}
\newcommand*\tred[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}}
\usepackage{fbox}
\usepackage{tikz}
\usetikzlibrary{tikzmark}
\NewDocumentCommand{\pointto}{m}{%
  \tikz[remember picture] \draw[>->,color=blue,overlay] (0em,0.5ex) to
  ([shift={(0.5em,0pt)}]pic cs:#1);%
  \tikz[remember picture] \draw[color=gray, overlay]
  ([shift={(0.5em,0.5ex)}]pic cs:#1) circle [radius=8pt];}
\NewDocumentCommand{\pointtol}{m}{%
  \tikz[remember picture] \draw[>->,color=blue,overlay] (0em,0.5ex) to
  [bend left] ([shift={(0.5em,0pt)}]pic cs:#1);%
  \tikz[remember picture] \draw[color=gray, overlay]
  ([shift={(0.5em,0.5ex)}]pic cs:#1) circle [radius=8pt];}
\NewDocumentCommand{\pointtor}{m}{%
  \tikz[remember picture] \draw[>->,color=blue,overlay] (0em,0.5ex) to
  [bend right] ([shift={(0.5em,0pt)}]pic cs:#1);%
  \tikz[remember picture] \draw[color=gray, overlay]
  ([shift={(0.5em,0.5ex)}]pic cs:#1) circle [radius=8pt];}
\NewDocumentCommand{\pointtoer}{m}{%
  \tikz[remember picture] \draw[>->,color=blue,overlay] (0em,0.5ex) to
  [bend right] ([shift={(0em,0pt)}]pic cs:#1);%
  \tikz[remember picture] \draw[color=gray, overlay]
  ([shift={(-0.5em,0.5ex)}]pic cs:#1) ellipse [x radius=45pt, y
  radius=6pt];}
\usepackage[breakable, skins, xparse]{tcolorbox}
\tcbset{colback=white, boxrule=0.4pt, colframe=cinnamon,
  breakable}
\usepackage[newfloat]{minted}
\labelformat{listing}{listing~#1}
\ifbool{nocolordoc}{\usemintedstyle{bw}}{}
\setminted{bgcolor=ekdcolor,linenos, fontsize=\small}
\newminted[ekdlua]{lua}{bgcolor={}, linenos, fontsize=\relsize{-0.5},
  xleftmargin=12pt, breaklines, numberblanklines=false, numbersep=3pt,
  firstnumber=last}
\renewcommand{\theFancyVerbLine}{\normalfont\smaller\arabic{FancyVerbLine}}
\usepackage[contents]{colordoc}
\newcommand{\pkg}[1]{\textsf{#1}\index{#1=#1 (package)}}
\newcommand{\env}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{#1=#1 (environment)}}
\backgroundcolor{c}{ekdcolor}
\usepackage{caption}
\captionsetup[listing]{position=above,skip=-1ex}
\usepackage{needspace}
\NewDocumentCommand{\captof}{O{listing} m O{}}{%
  \bgroup
  \needspace{5\baselineskip}%
  \vskip 1ex plus 2pt minus 2pt%
  \captionof{#1}{#2}%
  #3%
  \egroup}
% \usepackage{etoc}
% \etocsettocdepth{paragraph}
% \newcommand{\ekdtableofcontents}{%
%   \begingroup
%   \etocsetstyle{section}{}{}
%   {\etocsavedsectiontocline{%
%       \numberline{\etocnumber}\etocname}{\etocpage}}{}
%   \etocsetstyle{subsection}{}{}
%   {\etocsavedsubsectiontocline{%
%       \numberline{\etocnumber}\etocname}{\etocpage}}{}%
%   \etocsetstyle{subsubsection}{}{}
%   {\etocsavedsubsubsectiontocline{%
%       \numberline{\etocnumber}\etocname}{\etocpage}}{}%
%   \etocsetstyle{paragraph}{}{\leftskip2cm\rightskip 2.2em \parfillskip
%     0pt plus 1fil\relax \nobreak}
%   {\noindent\etocname{} \etocpage{} }{\par}%
%   \etocmulticolstyle[2]{\section*{Contents}}
%   \pdfbookmark[1]{Contents}{toc}
%   \tableofcontents
%   \endgroup}
\EnableCrossrefs
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
 %\OnlyDescription
\begin{document}
  \DocInput{\jobname.dtx}
  \PrintChanges
  \PrintIndex
\end{document}
%</driver>
% \fi
%
% \CheckSum{1669}
%
% \CharacterTable
%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
%
% \GetFileInfo{\jobname.dtx}
% \DoNotIndex{\newcommand,\newenvironment,\begin,\begingroup}
% \DoNotIndex{\bgroup,\def,\edef,\egroup,\else,\expandafter,\endgroup}
% \DoNotIndex{\fi,\ifdefined,\luadirect,\luastring,\luastringN}
% \DoNotIndex{\luastringO,\NewDocumentCommand,\space,\unexpanded}
%
% \pdfbookmark[1]{\metaterm{title}}{title}
% \begin{tcolorbox}[
%   colframe=black,
%   enhanced,
%   drop lifted shadow,
%   colback=white,
%   boxrule=.25mm,
%   halign=center,
%   center
%   ]
%   \metapick[print]{titletext}
% \end{tcolorbox}
%
% \tableofcontents
% \listoflistings
%
% \changes{v0.99a}{2020/07/08}{First public release (documentation in
% progress)}
%
% \begin{abstract}
%   \pkg{ekdosis} is a Lua\LaTeX{} package designed for
%   multilingual critical editions. It can be used to typeset texts
%   and different layers of critical notes in any direction accepted
%   by Lua\TeX. Texts can be arranged in running paragraphs or on
%   facing pages, in any number of columns which in turn can be
%   synchronized or not. In addition to printed texts,
%   \pkg{ekdosis} can convert \texttt{.tex} source files so as to
%   produce \texttt{TEI xml} compliant critical
%   editions. Database-driven encoding under \LaTeX{} then allows
%   extraction of texts entered segment by segment according to
%   various criteria: main edited text, variant readings, translations
%   or annotated borrowings between texts. It is published under the
%   terms of the GNU General Public License (GPL) version 3.
% \end{abstract}
%
% \section*{License and Disclaimer}
% \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{License and disclamer}
% \subsection*{License Applicable to this Document}
% \pdfbookmark[2]{Licence applicable to this document}{copyright-doc}
% \leavevmode\marginpar{\hfill\texttt{fdl1.3}}
% \metapick[print]{rightstext} (See below \vref{sec:fdl}.)
%
% \subsection*{License Applicable to the Software}
% \pdfbookmark[2]{Licence applicable to the software}{copyright-soft}
% \label{sec:license-software}
%
% \pkg{ekdosis} --- \metapick[print]{subtitle}
% \metapick[print]{copyrightstatement}
%
% Please send error reports and suggestions for improvements to Robert
% Alessi:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item email: \mailto[ekdosis package]{alessi@roberalessi.net}
% \item website: \url{http://www.robertalessi.net/ekdosis}
% \item development: \url{http://git.robertalessi.net/ekdosis}
% \item comments, feature requests, bug reports:
% \url{https://gitlab.com/ralessi/eksodis/issues}
% \end{itemize}
%
% \leavevmode\marginpar{\hfill\texttt{gpl3+}}
% This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
% it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
% the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
% (at your option) any later version.
%
% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
% General Public License for more details.
%
% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
% along with this program.  If not, see
% \href{http://www.gnu.org/licenses}%
% {\texttt{<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>}}.
%
% This release of \pkg{ekdosis} consists of the following
% source files:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item |ekdosis.ins|
% \item |ekdosis.dtx|
% \item |ekdosis.el|
% \item |Makefile|
% \end{itemize}
%
% \section{Introduction}
% \label{sec:introduction}
% \begin{comment}
%   \begin{keyfigure}{l={fig:grid-typesetting},c={Grid Typesetting
%     (which never came into existence)}, t={Each square in the grid
%     has a side length of \unit[10]{pt}. Therefore, the distance
%     between the last line of the text and the first line of the
%     apparatus is here approximately \unit[25]{pt}.}}
%     \centering
%     \begin{tikzpicture}
%       \draw[gainsboro,thin] (0.5,0.5) grid [step=10pt] (10,5); %
%       \path node [align=justify, text width=8cm] at (5.5,3) {%
%       I saw my friend Peter at the station yesterday. We were both
%       in a great mood.  \enquote{How nice to find you here!} he
%       said. I chuckled to myself, recalling the last time we
%       met.\par
%       \rule{3cm}{0.01cm}\par\footnotesize%
%       \textbf{1}~saw A] met B\hskip1em Peter A] John B \hskip1em
%       \textbf{2}~great A] good B\hskip1em \textbf{2--3}~How
%       nice... said A] \emph{om.} B\hskip1em \textbf{4} \emph{post}
%       met \emph{add.} there B.}; \node at (0,3) {\scriptsize
%       $\approx$ \unit[25]{pt}}; \draw [->] (0,2.875) -- (0,2.025);
%     \end{tikzpicture}
%   \end{keyfigure}
% \end{comment}
% 
% The reader will find here, by way of introduction, a summarized
% version of the first part of an article that the author submitted
% some weeks ago to the
% \mkbibemph{\citefield{Alessi2020}{journaltitle}} as a contribution
% to a Digital Humanities workshop held at Stanford University
% (\printdate{2019-04-15}).\footcite{Alessi2020}
%
% The name of this package, \pkg{ekdosis}, derives from a Greek
% action noun\---\sg{ἔκδοσις}\---the meaning of which is:
% \enquote{publishing a book}, and also in concrete sense: \enquote{a
% publication, treatise}. For us moderns, this term refers to a long
% tradition of scholarly work consisting in establishing from
% manuscript evidence the texts of Greek and Latin classics that were
% handled down through the Middle Ages to the time of the first
% printed editions. Of course, this definition is extendible to other
% languages as well. The basic premise is that critical editions
% exhibit reconstructed texts from manuscript evidence either under
% the title of the edited text (direct tradition) or from explicit
% citations or parallel passages or translations in other languages
% (indirect tradition).
%
% Whether in print or digital, critical editions come with an
% apparatus criticus in which is mentioned all the evidence that was
% used to build the edited text. Arguably, it is precisely on this
% common point that the two kind of editions part ways for reading a
% traditional, well written apparatus criticus is only meant for
% experienced readers. Getting oneself familiarized with its many
% conventional rules is not unrelated to learning a language, equipped
% with technical terms, grammar rules and style embellishments, which
% came into existence out of over three centuries of scholarly
% attainments. Nevertheless, whereas this language is immediately
% accessible to human mind's ability to use language and interpret
% conventional symbols, it is quite inaccessible to a computer unless
% every item of information has been encoded in the rather dumb format
% that is suited to machines.
%
% On the other hand, editions in print have their own limitations. For
% example, every detail that editors of classical texts decide to
% discard to save space, regardless to its relevance to the purpose of
% the edition, is lost permanently as in the case of dialectal
% coloring of ancient books. Furthermore, passages collected as
% indirect tradition are only available as references in the
% \emph{apparatus testium} and cannot be referred to the original
% text. As a result, the reader is refrained from bestowing attention
% upon major parallel passages to understand better difficult passages.
%
% To conclude on these issues, print publications and digital editions
% are often contrasted as they belonged to two different
% worlds.\footnote{For a good illustration of this point, see
% \cite[\mkbibquote{Content, not Display}]{DLL-TC}.}  It is commonly
% said that the content of editions in print is the result of the
% binding of the book itself as an object, whereas digital editions,
% in which format and presentation are by definition separated from
% content, are free from limitations coming from such bindings. To sum
% up from the foregoing considerations, this statement is likely to be
% qualified: as already seen above, the apparatus criticus must be
% looked at as a brilliant production of mind refined by centuries of
% scholarly tradition\---and surely tradition must go on\---arguably
% not as compact paragraphs that require special and painful training
% to be \enquote*{decoded}. On the other hand, what editions in print
% do not provide are what \citename{Mastronarde.Tarrant2017}{author}
% have called \enquote{actionable texts for use in digital research},%
% {\interfootnotelinepenalty=10000\footcite{Mastronarde.Tarrant2017}}
% namely database-driven texts allowing the reader to select
% annotations and display or arrange translations, parallel passages
% or borrowings in a variety of ways.
% 
% \pkg{ekdosis} can be seen as an attempt at combining the two
% approaches.
%
% \subsection{Requirements}
% \label{sec:requirements}
% Please refer to \vref{ref:ekdrequirements}.
%
% \subsection{Features}
% \label{sec:features}
% A list of the main features of \pkg{ekdosis} follows:---
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item \label{it:multicol-feature}\emph{Multilingual critical
%   editions\/}: \pkg{ekdosis} can be used to typeset any number of
%   texts in any direction accepted by \hologo{LuaTeX}. Running
%   paragraphs of text can be arranged in any number of columns,
%   either on single or facing pages, which in turn can be
%   synchronized or not. \pkg{ekdosis} is also suitable for complex
%   layouts as in the case of Arabic poetry or images where three-way
%   alignment is required, or diagrams, \emph{\&c}.
% \item \label{it:multilayer-feature}\emph{Apparatus criticus\/}:
%   Edited texts can receive multiple layers of apparatus, e.g.\
%   apparatus criticus (to record variant readings), apparatus fontium
%   (to collect references to texts quoted or cited in the edited
%   text), apparatus testium (to collect testimonia or parallel
%   passages), or any kind of short notes to be printed on the same
%   page as the edited text, \emph{\&c}.
% \item \texttt{TEI xml} output: \pkg{ekdosis} can be instructed to
%   output both PDF and \texttt{TEI xml} files at the same time.
% \item \emph{Database-driven encoding} under \LaTeX{} of texts
%   entered segment by segment allows for alignment of parallel texts
%   from multilingual corpora.
% \end{enumerate}
%
% Before going into detail, the following simple example will give the
% reader a general idea of the method of encoding with
% \pkg{ekdosis} authoritative texts composed of lemmata, in a way
% that is very close to \texttt{TEI xml} encoding:---
%
% \captof{The \enquote{Peter/John} basic example}[\label{lst:pj1}]
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}{latex}
\begin{ekdosis}
  I 
  \app{
    \lem{saw}
    \rdg{met}
  }
  my friend \app{\lem{Peter}\rdg{John}} at the station yesterday.
\end{ekdosis}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \needspace{5\baselineskip}
% PDF output:---
% \medskip
% \begin{alignment}[flush,tcols=1,texts=specimen,apparatus=specimen]
%   \begin{specimen}
%   I 
%   \app{
%     \lem{saw}
%     \rdg{met}
%     }
%   my friend
%   \app{
%     \lem{Peter}
%     \rdg{John}
%     }
%   at the station yesterday.
%   \end{specimen}
% \end{alignment}
%
% \texttt{TEI xml} output:---
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{xml}
<p>I 
<app>
  <lem>saw</lem>
  <rdg>met</rdg>
</app>my friend 
<app>
  <lem>Peter</lem>
  <rdg>John</rdg>
</app>at the station yesterday.</p>
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% As can be seen from \vref{lst:pj1}, the edition text is inserted in
% the \env{ekdosis} environment (l.~1 to 8). Then two
% \cs{app}\marg{apparatus entry} commands (ll.~3 and 7) contain the
% lemma (\cs{lem}\marg{lemma}), namely the reading that is accepted by
% the editor, and at least one variant reading
% (\cs{rdg}\marg{reading}, ll.~5 and 7). As the listing shows, the
% editor is free to lay out the code in a legible manner to the eye:
% the first lemma above spans several lines whereas the second one is
% written in sequence without spaces.
%
% In the PDF ouput, the edition text is printed in the upper part of
% the page, above the line, and naturally shows the accepted
% readings. The margins are used for numeration. In the apparatus
% criticus, below the line, reference to the text is made by
% specifying the number of the line and if several entries refer to
% the same line, numbers are not repeated. Instead, entries are
% separated from one another by a broad horizontal space. Finally, a
% square bracket is used inside entries to distinguish the lemma from
% the variant readings.
%
% Furthermore, as said above, if a \texttt{TEI xml} output be
% required, \pkg{ekdosis} compiles an additional |.xml| file an
% excerpt of which is provided above.
%
% \section{The Basics of \pkg{ekdosis}}
% \label{sec:ekdosis-basics}
%
%\subsection{Loading the Package\---General Options}
%\label{sec:load-general-options}
%
% \pkg{ekdosis} is loaded in the preamble like so:---
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
\usepackage{ekdosis}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
% 
% \pkg{ekdosis} may be loaded with four optional \enquote*{named
% arguments} either of which is set using the syntax
% \meta{key}$=$\meta{value}. The description of the optional arguments
% follows.
%
% \danger The reader is invited to refer to the relevant sections of
% this documentation for more information on how to use them.
% 
% \DescribeOption{layout}\label{ref:layout-opt}
% |layout|$=$\verb+float|footins+\hfill\tcboxverb{Default: float}\\
% By default, layers of critical notes are inserted as a floating
% environment to be printed at the bottom of pages. |layout=footins|
% can be set to insert critical notes in the default footnote block
% which can be considered to be a special kind of float that is
% printed at the bottom of pages. In this case, the apparatus criticus
% will be inserted between regular numbered footnotes, but will carry
% no footnote mark of its own.
%
% \DescribeOption{divs}\label{ref:divs-opt}
% |divs|$=$\verb+ekdosis|latex+\hfill\tcboxverb{Default: ekdosis}\\
% In many occasions, \LaTeX{} standard textual divisions do not meet
% the specific requirements of classical and literary texts, the
% divisions of which may depend on many different received
% traditions. \pkg{ekdosis} provides a flexible mechanism in which
% format and presentation have been carefully separated from
% content. It is designed to build un-numbered \texttt{TEI} divisions
% allowed to nest recursively.\footnote{See below,
% \vref{sec:body-divisions}.} However, if |divs| be set to |latex|,
% \LaTeX{} standard textual divisions can be used and will be
% translated into \texttt{TEI} numbered |<div>| elements.
%
% \danger It must be noted that the two styles are mutually exclusive.
% \vskip\baselineskip
% 
% \DescribeOption{parnotes}\label{ref:parnotes-opt}
% |parnotes|$=$\verb+true|false|roman+%
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: not set}\\
% This named argument does not need a value as it defaults to |true|
% if it is used. Apparatus criticus typeset by \pkg{ekdosis} may
% contain notes and footnotes. The latter can be laid out as
% paragraphed notes below the block of critical notes by means of the
% \pkg{parnotes} package. Additionally, |parnotes=roman| prints these
% footnotes numbered with Roman numerals.
%
% \DescribeOption{teiexport}\label{ref:teiexport-option}
% |teiexport|$=$\verb+true|false|tidy+%
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: not set}\\
% This named argument does not need a value as it defaults to |true|
% if it is used. If |teiexport| be set to |true|, \pkg{ekdosis} is
% instructed to output both PDF and \texttt{TEI xml} files at the same
% time. By default, the \texttt{TEI} file will receive the same
% basename as the |.tex| source file, suffixed with |-tei.xml|. The
% raw |.xml| file that is produced by \pkg{ekdosis} can be further
% processed by the \textsf{tidy} console application.\footnote{See
% \url{http://www.html-tidy.org}.} To make this happen, \textsf{tidy}
% must be installed and the |.tex| source file must be compiled with
% the |--shell-escape| facility so that spawning programs from
% \LaTeX{} can be allowed.\footnote{See
% \url{https://texfaq.org/FAQ-spawnprog} for more information on how
% to do this.}
%
% As an example, the following line loads \pkg{ekdosis} and instructs
% it to output a \texttt{TEI xml} file (in addition to the PDF one)
% and to use \pkg{parnotes} to format with Roman numerals the footnotes
% that are inserted in the apparatus criticus:---
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
\usepackage[teiexport, parnotes=roman]{ekdosis}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \subsection{Witnesses, Hands, Shorthands \& Scholars}
% \label{sec:declarations}
% Any reference that is to be used in the apparatus criticus must be
% \enquote{declared} in the preamble beforehand, namely: manuscript
% sigla (either for single manuscripts or manuscript families, primary
% or later hands, \emph{\&c.}) or abbreviated last names of scholars.
% To that effect, \pkg{ekdosis} provides the following preamble-only
% commands:---
% 
% \paragraph{Witnesses}
% \DescribeMacro{\DeclareWitness} \cs{DeclareWitness}\marg{unique
% id}\marg{rendition}\marg{description}\oarg{options}
% \label{ref:declarewitness}\\
% This command requires three mandatory arguments enclosed between
% curly braces used to specify consecutively:
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item The unique identifier of the witness to be used both in the
%   |.tex| source file and as an |xml:id| in the \texttt{TEI xml}
%   output if any.
% \item The rendition to be used in the printed apparatus criticus,
%   which also will be found within the |<sourceDesc>| element of the
%   \texttt{TEI} header where the description of the witness occurs,
%   within a |<abbr type="siglum">| element.
% \item A basic description of the manuscript to be found in a typical
%   printed Conspectus Siglorum, namely: the name of the manuscript
%   followed by its call number.
% \end{enumerate}
% Finally, the optional argument of \cs{DeclareWitness} accepts a
% comma-separated list of the following \enquote{name=value} arguments
% that are used to collect items of information to be found within
% the |<msIdentifer>| element in the \texttt{TEI}
% header:---\footnote{See
% \url{https://tei-c.org/release/doc/tei-p5-doc/en/html/MS.html\#msid}
% for detailed information on these elements.}\\
% \DescribeOption{settlement} |settlement|$=$\meta{name}: The name of
% a city or administrative unit.\\
% \DescribeOption{institution} |institution|$=$\meta{name}: The name
% of an institution such as a university or library.\\
% \DescribeOption{repository} |repository|$=$\meta{name}: The name of
% the repository within which the witness is stored.\\
% \DescribeOption{collection} |collection|$=$\meta{name}: The name of
% a collection of manuscripts.\\
% \DescribeOption{idno} |idno|$=$\meta{call \#}: Any form of call
% number.\\
% \DescribeOption{msName} |msName|$=$\meta{name}: The name commonly
% used for the witness.\\
% \DescribeOption{origDate} |origDate|$=$\meta{date}: Any form of date
% used to identify the date of origin for the witness.
%
% \label{ref:marcianus-b}
% To take here one example, a witness such as the \emph{Marcianus
% Graecus}~269, referred to as manuscript \enquote*{M} in the
% editions, which contains sixty treatises from Hippocrates, could be
% declared as follows:--- \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
\DeclareWitness{M}{M}{\emph{Marcianus Gr.} 269}[
        settlement=Venice,
        institution=Marciana Library,
        msName=Marcianus Gr.,
        idno=269,
        origDate=s. X]
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \paragraph{Hands} 
% \DescribeMacro{\DeclareHand} \cs{DeclareHand}\marg{unique
% id}\marg{base ms.}\marg{rendition}\oarg{note}\\
% This command requires three mandatory arguments enclosed between
% curly braces and one optional argument between square brackets used
% to specify consecutively:---
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item The unique identifier of the hand to be used both in the
% |.tex| source file and as an |xml:id| in the \texttt{TEI xml} output
% if any.
% \item The unique idendifier of the witness the hand is related
% to. Of course, this witness must have been declared beforehand.
% \item The rendition to be used in the printed apparatus criticus,
% which also will be found within the |<handNote>| element of the
% \texttt{TEI} header where the description of the hand occurs, within
% a |<abbr type="siglum">| element.
% \item Some further information about the hand.
% \end{enumerate}
%
% To continue the preceding example, here is how additions and
% corrections found in the \emph{Marcianus Gr.}~269 could be declared
% after this witness has been declared itself:---
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
\DeclareHand{M1}{M}{M\textsuperscript{1}}[Emendatio scribae ipsius]
\DeclareHand{M2}{M}{M\textsuperscript{2}}[Manus posterior]
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% As can be seen, values such as |M|, |M1| and |M2| in the |.tex|
% source file will be printed as \getsiglum{M}, \getsiglum{M1} and
% \getsiglum{M2} respectively. Not only the code gains legibility, but
% also flexibility for simply changing any declared rendition will
% update corresponding sigla thoughout the entire edition.
%
% As a final example, here is how \pkg{ekdosis} would encode
% information as declared above for the \emph{Marcianus Gr.}~269
% should a \texttt{TEI} output be required:---
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{xml}
<sourceDesc>
  <listWit>
    <witness xml:id="M">
    <abbr type="siglum">M</abbr>
    <emph>Marcianus Gr.</emph>269 
    <msDesc>
      <msIdentifier>
        <settlement>Venice</settlement>
        <institution>Marciana Library</institution>
        <idno>269</idno>
        <msName>
          <emph>Marcianus Gr.</emph>
        </msName>
      </msIdentifier>
      <physDesc>
        <handDesc hands="2">
          <handNote xml:id="M1">
            <abbr type="siglum">M
            <hi rend="sup">1</hi></abbr>
            <p>Emendatio scribae ipius</p>
          </handNote>
          <handNote xml:id="M2">
            <abbr type="siglum">M
            <hi rend="sup">2</hi></abbr>
            <p>Manus posterior</p>
          </handNote>
        </handDesc>
      </physDesc>
      <history>
        <origin>
          <origDate>s. X</origDate>
        </origin>
      </history>
    </msDesc></witness>
  </listWit>
</sourceDesc>
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
% \label{ref:marcianus-e}
%
% \paragraph{Shorthands}
% \DescribeMacro{\DeclareShorthand} \cs{DeclareShorthand}\marg{unique
% id}\marg{rendition}\marg{csv list of witnesses}\\
% This command provides a convenient way to declare \emph{families} of
% witnesses. It takes three mandatory arguments used to specify
% consecutively:---
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item The unique identifier of the family to be used in the |.tex|
%   source file.
% \item The rendition to be used in the printed apparatus criticus.
% \item A comma-separated list of previously declared witnesses.
% \end{enumerate}
%
% As an example, the manuscripts of Caesar's \emph{Gallic War} are
% divided into two families: α, which includes mss.\ A, M, B, R, S, L
% and N, and β, which includes mss.\ T, f, U and l. Therefore,
% provided that all these witnesses have been already declared, here
% is how the two families α  and β could be
% declared:---\footnote{These witnesses are used in the example
% provided below in \vref{lst:caesar-bg}.}
% \label{ref:caesar-bg-sigla}
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
\DeclareShorthand{a}{α}{A,M,B,R,S,L,N}
\DeclareShorthand{b}{β}{T,f,U,l}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% Then, symbols |a| and |b| can be used in the |.tex| source file in
% place of manuscripts that belong to either family.
%
% \paragraph{Scholars}
% \label{ref:declare-scholar}
% \DescribeMacro{\DeclareScholar} \cs{DeclareScholar}\marg{unique
% label}\marg{rendition}\\
% The \emph{Conspectus Siglorum} that is placed ahead of the edition
% text is traditionally divided into two parts: a)~\emph{Codices},
% which provides the list of sigla used in the apparatus,
% b)~\emph{Editiones uel Studia}, which provides references to
% scholars whose published or unpublished works contain conjectures
% used in the apparatus criticus. \cs{DeclareScholar} takes two
% mandatory arguments used to specify consecutively:---
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item A unique label used in the |.tex| source file to refer to the
%   work where the conjecture is found.
% \item The rendition to be used in the printed apparatus criticus.
% \end{enumerate}
%
% As \pkg{ekdosis} can include and use \texttt{TEI xml} compliant
% lists of references,\footnote{See below
% \vref{sec:references-cited-works}.} it is avisable to use
% Bib\hologo{(La)TeX} labels in the first argument of
% \cs{DeclareScholar}. Likewise, shorthands fields from the
% bibliographical database can be recalled from within the second
% argument of \cs{DeclareScholar}:---
% 
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
\DeclareScholar{Wil}{Wilamowitz}
% or for example:
\DeclareScholar{Wil}{\citename{Wil}{shorteditor}}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
% \label{sec:declarations-end}
%
% \subsubsection{Printing Formatted Witnesses
% --- Conspectus Siglorum}
% \label{sec:print-witnesses}
% Once witnesses, hands and scholars have been declared, \pkg{ekdosis}
% provides two commands to have them printed as declared from their
% indentifiers.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\getsiglum} \cs{getsiglum}\marg{csv list of witnesses
% or single witness} behaves exactly as the |wit| optional argument of
% \cs{lem} and \cs{rdg} described below on pages~\pageref{ref:lem-wit}
% and \pageref{ref:rdg-wit}. From a single identifier or from a
% comma-separated list of identifiers, it returns their formatted
% counterparts. To return to the example provided
% \vpagerefrange{ref:marcianus-b}{ref:marcianus-e}, |\getsiglum{M}|
% would return \getsiglum{M}, while |\getsiglum{M1}| would return
% \getsiglum{M1}.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\SigLine} \cs{SigLine}\marg{unique id} returns from
% \meta{unique id} used in the first argument of
% \cs{DeclareWitness}\footnote{See above
% \vpageref{ref:declarewitness}.} a line ready to be inserted in a
% table set to print a Conspectus Siglorum with the following items of
% information separated by the symbol |&|: the siglum referring to the
% witness, the contents of the |description| field and the contents of
% the |origDate| field. An example of how one could print the
% Conspectus Siglorum of the manuscripts of Caesar's \emph{Gallic War}
% from the list provided \vpageref{ref:caesar-bg-sigla} follows:---
%
% \captof{Conspectus Siglorum of Caesar's \emph{Gallic War}}
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
\begin{xltabular}[c]{0.75\linewidth}{lXl}
  \caption*{\textbf{Conspectus siglorum}}\\
  \multicolumn{3}{c}{\emph{Familia} \getsiglum{a}}\\
  \SigLine{A}\\
  & \getsiglum{A1} \emph{Emendationes scribae ipsius} & \\
  \SigLine{M}\\
  [...]
  \SigLine{N}\\
  \multicolumn{3}{c}{\emph{Familia} \getsiglum{b}}\\
  \SigLine{T}\\
  [...]
  \SigLine{l}\\
\end{xltabular}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \begin{xltabular}[c]{0.75\linewidth}{lXl}
%   \caption*{\textbf{Conspectus siglorum}}\\
%   \multicolumn{3}{c}{\emph{Familia} \getsiglum{ca}}\\
%   \SigLine{cA}\\
%   & \getsiglum{cA1} \emph{Emendationes scribae ipsius} & \\
%   \SigLine{cM}\\
%   \SigLine{cB}\\
%   \SigLine{cR}\\
%   \SigLine{cS}\\
%   \SigLine{cL}\\
%   \SigLine{cN}\\
%   \multicolumn{3}{c}{\emph{Familia} \getsiglum{cb}}\\
%   \SigLine{cT}\\
%   \SigLine{cf}\\
%   \SigLine{cU}\\
%   \SigLine{cl}\\
% \end{xltabular}
%
% \subsection{Editing a Single Text With No Translation}
% \label{sec:single-text-editing}
% \DescribeEnv{ekdosis}
% Running paragraphs of one single text to be edited should be
% inserted in the \env{ekdosis} environment, like so:---\footnote{See
% above \vref{lst:pj1}.}
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
\begin{ekdosis}
  Edition text goes here.
\end{ekdosis}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
% 
% \paragraph{Apparatus Entries}
% \DescribeMacro{\app} \cs{app}|[type=|\meta{type}|]|\marg{apparatus
% entries}\label{ref:app-cmd}\\
% This command takes one mandatory argument and accepts one optional
% argument.  Once references to be used as witnesses in the apparatus
% criticus have been declared in the preamble as described in
% \ref{sec:declarations}
% \vpagerefrange{sec:declarations}{sec:declarations-end}, the \cs{app}
% command is used for inserting entries in the apparatus criticus,
% either lemmata, readings or notes, like so:---
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
I saw my friend \app{\lem{Peter}\rdg{John}} yesterday.
or:
I saw my friend
  \app{
    \lem{Peter}
    \rdg{John}
  }
yesterday.
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
% \cs{app} accepts one further optional argument:---\\
% \DescribeOption{type} |type|$=$\meta{type}\label{ref:app-type}
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: default}\\
% As will be described below in \vref{sec:multilayer-apparatus},
% \pkg{ekdosis} initially sets one layer of notes\--- the |default|
% layer\---in the apparatus criticus. This layer is fit to receive
% notes related to variant readings from witnesses and sources used by
% the editor to establish the edition text. Additional layers can be
% defined to receive other kinds of notes, such as references to texts
% quoted or cited in the text of the edition (\emph{apparatus
% fontium}), references to testimonia, or quotations of the edited
% text by other authors (\emph{apparatus testium}), explanatory notes,
% and so forth.\footnote{See below, \vref{ref:type-note}.} Once
% additional layers have been defined and assigned to new
% \enquote*{types}, such as \enquote*{testium} and the like, these
% types can be used as values appended to the |type| \enquote*{named
% option}. For more information about inserting notes in
% multiple-layer apparatus, see \vref{sec:notes-in-multilayer-app}.
%
% \paragraph{Base text and variants} As can be seen in the example
% above, there are two kinds of individual readings: the \emph{lemma},
% which contains the base text accepted by the editor, and the
% \emph{reading}, which contains deviant readings rejected by the
% editor.
%
% \paragraph{Lemmata} \DescribeMacro{\lem}
% \cs{lem}\oarg{options}\marg{lemma text}\\
% As \meta{lemma text} is a word or a phrase judged by the editor to
% be authentic or authoritative, \cs{lem} prints it by default both in
% the edition text and as the first part of a new entry in the
% apparatus criticus, preceded by the line number where it occurs or a
% broad space if the entry refers to the same line as the preceding
% entry. \label{ref:lem-opts-b}The optional argument of \cs{lem}
% accepts the following
% comma-separated list of \enquote{name$=$value} arguments:---\\
% \DescribeOption{wit} |wit|$=$\meta{csv list of
% witnesses}\label{ref:lem-wit}\\
% While a single witness may be recorded as in |wit=A|,
% comma-separated lists of multiple witnesses must obviously be
% enclosed in curly braces, like so:
% |wit={A,B,C}|. \label{ref:mss-sep-families}It must be noted
% that witnesses can be grouped by using spaces as separators, like
% so: \verb*|wit={A,B,C, D,E,F}|.\\
% \DescribeOption{alt} |alt|$=$\meta{alternate lemma}\\
% While the mandatory argument of \cs{lem}, \meta{lemma text}, is
% always used to print the edition text in the upper part of the page,
% \meta{alternate lemma}, if specified, supersedes what is printed in
% the related entry of the apparatus criticus. This mechanism is useful
% in more than one respect. For instance, it can be used to insert
% abbreviated lemmata in the apparatus criticus, or to introduce an
% alternate way of writing entries with Latin technical terms in the
% apparatus criticus as will be demonstrated below in the example
% provided by \vref{lst:pj2}.\\
% \DescribeOption{sep} |sep|$=$\meta{separator}\\
% |sep| allows to change the symbol used to separate the lemma text
% from deviant readings, which is by default the closing square
% bracket (|]|)\\
% \DescribeOption{nosep} |nosep|$=$\verb+true|false+\\
% This named argument does not need a value as it defaults to |true|
% if it is used. Obviously, |nosep| removes the separator mentioned
% above.\\
% \DescribeOption{nolem} |nolem|$=$\verb+true|false+\\
% This named argument does not need a value as it defaults to |true|
% if it is used. |nolem| completely removes the lemma text from the
% related
% entry in the apparatus criticus.\\
% \DescribeOption{type} |type|$=$\meta{value}\\
% This named argument has no effect on the apparatus criticus of the
% edition in print, but it is used in the \texttt{TEI xml} ouput to
% classify the variation recorded in the entry according to some
% convenient typology. Categories such as lexical, morphological,
% orthographical and the like may apply.
%
% \needspace{11\baselineskip}
% Finally, four named arguments can be used to insert words at the
% following specific places in the lemma text:\\
% \noindent
% \fparbox*{\centered{\textbf{1} \tikzmark{pre}\tred{pre} Peter
% \tikzmark{post}\tred{post} \tikzmark{prewit}\tred{prewit}
% \getsiglum{pjA}
% \tikzmark{postwit}\tred{postwit}] John \getsiglum{pjB}}}\\
% \DescribeOption{pre} |pre|$=$\meta{words}\pointtol{pre}\\
% |pre| inserts \meta{words} \emph{before} the lemma text.\\
% \DescribeOption{post} |post|$=$\meta{words}\pointto{post}\\
% |post| inserts \meta{words} \emph{after} the lemma text.\\
% \DescribeOption{prewit} |prewit|$=$\meta{words}\pointto{prewit}\\
% |prewit| inserts \meta{words} \emph{before} the list of witnesses.\\
% \DescribeOption{postwit} |postwit|$=$\meta{words}\pointtor{postwit}\\
% |postwit| inserts \meta{words} \emph{after} the list of witnesses.
% \label{ref:lem-opts-e}
%
% \paragraph{Readings} \DescribeMacro{\rdg}
% \cs{rdg}\oarg{options}\marg{variant reading}\\
% As \meta{reading} is a word or a phrase judged by the editor to be
% unsatisfactory or corrupted, \cs{rdg} prints it by default in the
% last part of the corresponding entry in the apparatus criticus,
% after the symbol that is used to separate words of the base text
% (the lemma text) from words rejected by the editor.  The optional
% argument of \cs{rdg} accepts a comma-separated list of
% \enquote{name$=$value} arguments that is almost identical to
% \cs{app}. Therefore, emphasis will be placed here only on the
% differences. The reader is invited to refer to the description
% provided above \vpagerefrange{ref:lem-opts-b}{ref:lem-opts-e} for
% more detailed information:---\\
% \DescribeOption{wit} |wit|$=$\meta{csv list of
% witnesses}\label{ref:rdg-wit}\\
% \DescribeOption{alt} |alt|$=$\meta{alternate reading}\\
% \DescribeOption{nordg} |nordg|$=$\verb+true|false+\\
% This named argument does not need a value as it defaults to |true|
% if it is used. |nordg| completely removes the variant reading from
% the related entry in the apparatus criticus.\\
% \DescribeOption{type} |type|$=$\meta{value}\\
% \DescribeOption{pre} |pre|$=$\meta{words}\\
% \DescribeOption{post} |post|$=$\meta{words}\\
% \DescribeOption{prewit} |prewit|$=$\meta{words}\\
% \DescribeOption{postwit} |postwit|$=$\meta{words}\\
%
% \paragraph{Notes}
% \DescribeMacro{\note}\DescribeMacro{\note*}
% \cs{note}\oarg{options}\marg{text} or
% \cs{note*}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\label{ref:editorial-notes}\\
% It may happen that editorial notes be needed to record short
% comments of general nature \emph{between} lemmata and
% readings. \cs{note} inserts inline comments while \cs{note*} places
% comments below the entire apparatus block. Furthermore, if
% \pkg{ekdosis} has been loaded with the |parnotes| option as
% described above \vpageref{ref:parnotes-opt}, \cs{note*} will use the
% \pkg{parnotes} package to lay out the notes as an additional
% paragraph below the apparatus criticus. The optional argument of
% \cs{note}/\cs{note*} accepts the following comma-separated list of
% \enquote{name$=$value}
% arguments:---\\
% \DescribeOption{pre} |pre|$=$\meta{words}\\
% |pre| inserts \meta{words} immediately before the note.\\
% \DescribeOption{post} |post|$=$\meta{words}\\
% |post| inserts \meta{words} immediately after the note.\\
%
% \danger Under no circumstances is it permitted to insert this
% command \cs{note} or \cs{note*} inside the argument of \cs{lem} or
% \cs{rdg}. \cs{note}/\cs{note*} must go \emph{between} these
% commands. As a general rule, within \cs{app}|{}| elements, notes are
% inserted immediately \emph{after} the lemma or the variant reading
% they are related to. However, as will be described below in
% \vref{ref:type-note}, the command \cs{note}\---with no star
% appended\---that is used to insert explanatory notes or references
% to sources or testimonia is permitted within the mandatory argument
% of \cs{lem}|{}|, although it is subject to a very strict syntax.
%
% \Vref{lst:pj2} provides an illustration of some of the possibilities
% afforded by the commands just described:---
%
% \captof{The \enquote{Peter/John} full example}[\label{lst:pj2}]
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}{latex}
\begin{ekdosis}
  I 
  \app{
    \lem[wit=A]{saw}
    \rdg[wit=B]{met}}
  my friend
  \app{
    \lem{Peter}
    \rdg{John}
  }
  at the station yesterday. We were both in a
  \app{
    \lem[wit=A]{great}
    \rdg[wit=B]{good}}
  mood.
  \app{
    \lem[wit=A, alt={How nice... said}]{\enquote{How nice to find
        you here!} he said.}
    \note*{There are no quotation marks in the mss.}
    \rdg[wit=B, alt=\emph{om.}]{}}
  I chuckled to myself, recalling the last time we
  \app{
    \lem[wit=A,nolem]{met}
    \rdg[wit=B, alt={\emph{post} met \emph{add.} there}]{met
      there}
    \note*{Ms. \getsiglum{B} provides other additions of this kind.}}.
\end{ekdosis}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example> 
% \fi
% \resetlinenumber
% \begin{alignment}[flush,tcols=1,texts=specimen,apparatus=specimen]
%   \begin{specimen}
%     I \app{\lem[wit=pjA]{saw}\rdg[wit=pjB]{met}} my friend
%     \app{
%     \lem{Peter}
%     \rdg{John}
%   }
%     at the station yesterday. We were both in a
%     \app{
%     \lem[wit=pjA]{great}
%     \rdg[wit=pjB]{good}}
%     mood.
%     \app{
%     \lem[wit=pjA, alt={\textooquote How nice... said}]{\enquote{How
%     nice to find you here!} he said.}
%     \note*{There are no quotation marks in the mss.}
%     \rdg[wit=pjB, alt=\emph{om.}]{}}
%     I chuckled to myself, recalling the last time we
%     \app{
%     \lem[wit=pjA,nolem]{met}
%     \rdg[wit=pjB, alt={\emph{post} met \emph{add.} there}]{met
%     there}
%     \note*{Ms. \getsiglum{pjB} provides other additions of this kind.}}.
%   \end{specimen}
% \end{alignment}
%
% \begin{remarks}
% \item Close examination of lines~17--8 from \vref{lst:pj2} shows how
%   |alt| has been used to insert an abridged lemma text in the
%   apparatus criticus in print while keeping safe what is to be found
%   in the \texttt{TEI xml} output.
% \item The same technique has been used at line~24 to insert
%   alternate words, including Latin technical terms, in place of the
%   variant reading. Hence the use of |nolem| at line~23 to remove the
%   lemma text from the apparatus criticus in print.
% \item \cs{note*} has been used to insert short annotations in two
%   places (ll.~19 and 26).
% \item For an example of the use of |nordg|, see below
% \vref{lst:caesar-bg}, l.~11.
% \end{remarks}
%
% The corresponding \texttt{TEI xml} output produced by \pkg{ekdosis}
% from the \LaTeX{} source file follows:---
% 
% \captof{The \enquote{Peter/John} full example: \texttt{TEI xml}
% output}[\label{lst:pj2-tei}]
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{xml}
<p>I 
<app>
  <lem wit="#A">saw</lem>
  <rdg wit="#B">met</rdg>
</app>my friend 
<app>
  <lem>Peter</lem>
  <rdg>John</rdg>
</app>at the station yesterday. We were both in a
<app>
  <lem wit="#A">great</lem>
  <rdg wit="#B">good</rdg>
</app>mood. 
<app>
  <lem wit="#A">
  <quote>How nice to find you here!</quote> he said.</lem>
  <note>There are no quotation marks in the mss.</note>
  <rdg wit="#B" />
</app>I chuckled to myself, recalling the last time we 
<app>
  <lem wit="#A">met</lem>
  <rdg wit="#B">met there</rdg>
  <note>Ms. 
  <ref target="#B">B</ref>provides other additions of
  this kind.</note>
</app>.</p>
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \section{Alignment of Parallel Texts}
% \label{sec:alignment-basic}
% As already said above,\footnote{See point
% \vref{it:multicol-feature}.} \pkg{ekdosis} can arrange sundry texts
% in parallel columns\---synchronized or not\---either on the same
% page or on facing pages. Depending on what is needed, any text can
% be equipped with an apparatus criticus. The most common example is
% that of an edition of a classical text with an apparatus criticus
% accompanied by a translation into a modern language on the facing
% page. One can also imagine an edition of two classical texts or two
% different recensions of the same text, each of which provides
% variants recorded in separate apparatus crititus, laid out on the
% left-hand pages, with one or more translations on the corresponding
% right-hand pages, and so forth.
%
% \paragraph{The \env{alignment} Environment}
% \DescribeEnv{alignment} \cs{begin}|{alignment}|\oarg{options}\dots
% \cs{end}|{alignment}|\label{ref:alignment-syntax}\\
% This environment can be used as it is provided to typeset a standard
% critical edition, namely an edition text, equipped with an apparatus
% criticus and laid out on the left-hand pages, accompanied by a
% translation into a modern language on the facing pages.
%
% \DescribeEnv{edition}\DescribeEnv{translation} Within
% \env{alignment}, two environments are available by default:
% \cs{begin}|{edition}|\allowbreak\dots
% \cs{end}|{ed|\allowbreak|ition}| and \cs{begin}|{translation}|\dots
% \cs{end}|{translation}|. Obviously, the former is used to typeset
% the edition text with an apparatus criticus on the left, while the
% latter is used to typeset the translation on the right, like so:---
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
\begin{alignment}
  \begin{edition}
    First § of the edition text.
  \end{edition}
  \begin{translation}
    First § of the translation.
  \end{translation}
  \begin{edition}
    Second § of the edition text.
  \end{edition}
  \begin{translation}
    Second § of the translation.
  \end{translation}
\end{alignment}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \DescribeEnv{edition*}\DescribeEnv{translation*}
% \label{ref:starred-envs} Furthermore, so-called \enquote{starred}
% versions of these environments can be used at any point to
% synchronize texts, that is to print them in such a way that the tops
% of all paragraphs are vertically aligned. To that effect, it must be
% noted that merely applying this command on a single
% environment\---for instance the leftmost one\---will have all other
% associated paragraphs printed aligned.
%
% \danger While the whole edition text and the whole translation can
% be inserted in a single \env{edition}/\env{translation} environment
% respectively, it is recommended to enter both texts paragraph by
% paragraph as shown in the example above. Not only this method of
% encoding allows not to lose sight of paragraphs that are meant to be
% read together, but it is also the only way to align paragraphs in
% print, and it is much more suitable to mark up correspondence
% between spans of texts as will be demonstrated below in
% \vref{ref:segmentation}.
%
% As an illustration, a short extract of Caesar's \emph{Gallic War},
% VI, XIII.1 follows.\footnote{Latin text: \cite{Caesar-BG-v2};
% English translation: \cite{CaesarTr}.} See the list of sigla for
% manuscripts and manuscript families above
% \vpageref{ref:caesar-bg-sigla}. As this document is not set for
% duplex printing, both texts have been put together on the same
% page. However, the reader will find the full |.tex| source file
% in \vref{sec:caesar-gw-tex} and \texttt{TEI xml} output in
% \vref{sec:caesar-gw-tei}. The corresponding PDF output is available
% in \href{samples/Caesar_BG-6-13-1.pdf}{a separate file}:---
%
% \captof{Caesar's \emph{Gallic War}, VI, 13.1}[\label{lst:caesar-bg}]
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}{latex}
\begin{alignment}
  \begin{edition}
    \ekddiv{head=XIII, depth=2, n=6.13, type=section}
    In omni Gallia eorum hominum qui \app{
      \lem[wit=a]{aliquo}
      \rdg[wit=b, alt=in al-]{in aliquo}}
    sunt numero atque honore genera sunt duo. Nam plebes paene
    seruorum habetur loco, quae \app{
      \lem[wit={A,M}, alt={nihil audet (aut et \getsiglum{A1})
        per se}]{nihil audet per se}
      \rdg[wit=A1,nordg]{nihil aut et per se}
      \rdg[wit={R,S,L,N}]{nihil habet per se}
      \rdg[wit=b]{per se nihil audet}}, \app{
      \lem[wit=a]{nullo}
      \rdg[wit=b]{nulli}} adhibetur \app{
      \lem{consilio}
      \rdg[wit={T, U}, alt=conc-]{concilio}}.
  \end{edition}
  \begin{translation}
    \ekddiv{head=XIII, depth=2, n=6.13, type=section}
      Throughout all Gaul there are two orders of those men who are of
      any rank and dignity: for the commonality is held almost in the
      condition of slaves, and dares to undertake nothing of itself,
      and is admitted to no deliberation.
  \end{translation}
\end{alignment}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \resetlinenumber
% \FormatDiv{2}{}{.}
% \begin{alignment}[flush,lcols=2,
%                   texts=edition[xml:lang="la"];
%                   translation[xml:lang="en"]]
% \AtBeginEnvironment{edition}{\selectlanguage{latin}}
% \AtBeginEnvironment{translation}{\selectlanguage{american}}
%   \begin{edition}
%     \ekddiv{head=XIII, depth=2, n=6.13, type=section}
%     In omni Gallia eorum hominum qui \app{
%       \lem[wit=ca]{aliquo}
%       \rdg[wit=cb, alt=in al-]{in aliquo}}
%     sunt numero atque honore genera sunt duo. Nam plebes paene
%     seruorum habetur loco, quae \app{
%       \lem[wit={cA,cM}, alt={nihil audet (aut et \getsiglum{cA1})
%         per se}]{nihil audet per se}
%       \rdg[wit=cA1,nordg]{nihil aut et per se}
%       \rdg[wit={cR,cS,cL,cN}]{nihil habet per se}
%       \rdg[wit=cb]{per se nihil audet}}, \app{
%       \lem[wit=ca]{nullo}
%       \rdg[wit=cb]{nulli}} adhibetur \app{
%       \lem{consilio}
%       \rdg[wit={cT, cU}, alt=conc-]{concilio}}.
%   \end{edition}
%   \begin{translation}
%     \ekddiv{head=XIII, depth=2, n=6.13, type=section}
%       Throughout all Gaul there are two orders of those men who are of
%       any rank and dignity: for the commonality is held almost in the
%       condition of slaves, and dares to undertake nothing of itself,
%       and is admitted to no deliberation.
%   \end{translation}
% \end{alignment}
%
% \begin{remarks}
% \item As can be seen from the apparatus entry related to l.~4 above,
%   a subvariant has been inserted in the lemma part: \enquote{(aut et
%   \getsiglum{cA1})}. This was done by using |alt| in
%   \vref{lst:caesar-bg}, ll.~9--10. But as this variant is already
%   recorded\---and printed\---in the lemma part, it was necessary to
%   remove the entire otherwise redundant variant from the apparatus
%   criticus in print. Hence the use of |nordg| at l.~11.
% \item For examples of abbreviations, see ll.~6 and 17.
% \item Line~17 shows how mss.\ T and U (which belong to two distinct
%   subfamilies) have been separated from one another: %
%   \verb*+wit={T, U}+. See above \vpageref{ref:mss-sep-families} for
%   more information on this technique.
% \end{remarks}
%
% Finally, the corresponding \texttt{TEI xml} output follows:---
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{xml}
<div xml:id="div-edition_1" xml:lang="la">
  <div type="section" n="6.13">
    <head>XIII</head>
    <p>In omni Gallia eorum hominum qui 
    <app>
      <lem wit="#A #M #B #R #S #L #N">aliquo</lem>
      <rdg wit="#T #f #U #l">in aliquo</rdg>
    </app>sunt numero atque honore genera sunt duo. Nam
    plebes paene seruorum habetur loco, quae 
    <app>
      <lem wit="#A #M">nihil audet per se</lem>
      <rdg wit="#A1">nihil aut et per se</rdg>
      <rdg wit="#R #S #L #N">nihil habet per se</rdg>
      <rdg wit="#T #f #U #l">per se nihil audet</rdg>
    </app>, 
    <app>
      <lem wit="#A #M #B #R #S #L #N">nullo</lem>
      <rdg wit="#T #f #U #l">nulli</rdg>
    </app>adhibetur 
    <app>
      <lem>consilio</lem>
      <rdg wit="#T #U">concilio</rdg>
    </app>.</p>
  </div>
</div>
<div xml:id="div-translation_1" xml:lang="en">
  <div type="section" n="6.13">
    <head>XIII</head>
    <p>Throughout all Gaul there are two orders of those men
    who are of any rank and dignity: for the commonality is
    held almost in the condition of slaves, and dares to
    undertake nothing of itself, and is admitted to no
    deliberation.</p>
  </div>
</div>
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \subsection{Alignment of Several Texts}
% \label{sec:multiple-alignment}
% As described above \vpageref{ref:alignment-syntax}, the
% \env{alignment} environment may receive an optional argument in
% which
% the following \enquote{name$=$value} arguments are accepted:---\\
% \DescribeOption{tcols}
% |tcols|$=$\meta{number}\hfill\tcboxverb{Default: 2}\\
% |tcols| stores the \underLine{t}otal number of
% \underLine{col}umn\underLine{s} of text to be aligned.\\
% \DescribeOption{lcols}
% |lcols|$=$\meta{number}\hfill\tcboxverb{Default: 1}\\
% |lcols| stores the number of \underLine{col}umn\underLine{s} to be
% printed on the \underLine{l}eft-hand page, \emph{out of the total
% number} of columns specified with |tcols|. As can be seen from the
% preceding two default values, \env{alignment} initially sets two
% columns of text on facing pages. Of course, for this setting to work
% properly, one must ensure that the \env{alignment} environment is
% started on a
% left page.\\
% \DescribeOption{texts}
% |texts|$=$\meta{\underLine{semicolon}-separated
% values}\hfill\tcboxverb{Default: edition;translation}\\
% Depending on the total number of columns that has been specified
% with |tcols| above, |texts| is then used to define the names of the
% environments that shall receive edition texts, translations,
% \emph{\&c.} Furthermore, as described \vpageref{ref:starred-envs},
% \pkg{ekdosis} also defines \enquote{starred} versions of these
% environments to be used to synchronize columns so that corresponding
% paragraphs are printed vertically aligned. Some very important
% points need to be emphasized in this respect:---
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item Only unaccented letters of the alphabet (whatever the case)
%   are allowed to compose the names of \LaTeX{} environments.
% \item These names must be separated from one another by
%   \emph{semicolons}, as shown in red in the listing below at the end
%   of lines~1 and 2.
%   \begin{enumerate}
%   \item[\dbend] The colon at the end of line~3 closes the whole
%     value of |text| and acts as a higher level separator.
%   \end{enumerate}
% \item Each name may be followed by a \enquote*{suboptional} argument
%   between square brackets which will then be used to insert
%   \texttt{TEI xml} attributes in the corresponding |<div>|
%   element. For example,
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[escapeinside=++]{latex}
texts=latin[xml:lang="la"]+\textcolor{red}{;}+
      english[xml:lang="en"]+\textcolor{red}{;}+
      french[xml:lang="fr"]+\textcolor{red}{,}+
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
% will be converted into \texttt{TEI xml} as follows:---
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{xml}
<div xml:id="div-latin_1" xml:lang="la">
...
</div>
<div xml:id="div-english_1" xml:lang="en">
...
</div>
<div xml:id="div-french_1" xml:lang="fr">
...
</div>
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%   \begin{enumerate}
%   \item[\dbend] As can be seen, \pkg{ekdosis} takes care of
%     computing and inserting the |xml:id| attributes which are
%     therefore not accepted in the \enquote*{suboptional} arguments
%     of |texts|.
%   \end{enumerate}
% \item The names of the environments must be specified in exactly the
%   same order as they are supposed to appear in the print edition,
%   from left to right.
% \end{enumerate}
% \DescribeOption{apparatus}
% |apparatus|$=$\meta{\underLine{semicolon}-separated
% values}\hfill\tcboxverb{Default: edition}\\
% Then, the |apparatus| option, just as |texts|, takes a
% \underLine{semicolon}-separated list of previously defined
% environments that shall receive at least one layer of apparatus
% criticus.\\
% \DescribeOption{paired} |paired|$=$\verb+true|false+%
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: true (initially not set)}\\
% This named argument does not need a value as it defaults to |true|
% if it is used. By default, \pkg{ekdosis} follows the \LaTeX{} page
% numbering scheme when multiple texts are arranged on facing
% pages. The |paired| option leaves every right-hand page number
% unchanged, so that both facing pages hold the same page number.\\
% \DescribeOption{lineation} |lineation|$=$\verb+page|document+
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: document}\\
% This option applies to edition texts initially set to receive an
% apparatus criticus. By default, lines are continuously numbered
% throughout the document. |lineation=page| sets the numbering to
% start afresh at the top of each page.\\
% \DescribeOption{flush} |flush|$=$\verb+true|false+
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: false}\\
% This named argument does not need a value as it defaults to |true|
% if it is used. This option applies when two or more distinct
% \env{alignment} environments are started on the same page. Should
% this happen, any subsequent \env{alignment} environment must be set
% with the |flush| option so that every one of them carry its own
% apparatus criticus.
%
% As an example, the alignment of the Latin edition text of Caesar's
% \emph{Gallic War}, printed on left-hand pages, along with two
% translations into English and French, printed on right-hand pages,
% can be set as follows:---
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
\begin{alignment}[tcols=3,
                  lcols=1,
                  texts=latin[xml:lang="la"];
                        english[xml:lang="en"];
                        french[xml:lang="fr"],
                  apparatus=latin,
                  lineation=page]
  \begin{latin}
    Gallia est omnis divisa in partes tres quarum unam incolunt
    Belgae, [...]
  \end{latin}
  \begin{english}
    All Gaul is divided into three parts, one of which the Belgae
    inhabit, [...]
  \end{english}
  \begin{french}
    L'ensemble de la Gaule est divisé en trois parties: l'une est
    habitée par les Belges, [...]
  \end{french}
\end{alignment}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \DescribeMacro{\SetAlignment}
% \cs{SetAlignment}\marg{alignment settings}\\
% If the same alignment settings are to be shared by several
% \env{alignment} environments, common settings can be collected in
% the argument of \cs{SetAlignment}, like
% so:---\\
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
\SetAlignment{
  tcols=3,
  lcols=1,
  texts=latin[xml:lang="la"];
        english[xml:lang="en"];
        french[xml:lang="fr"],
  apparatus=latin,
  lineation=page
}
\begin{alignment}
  ...
\end{alignment}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \cs{SetAlignment} can be used either in the preamble or at
% any point of the document to set or to modify alignment settings.
%
% \subsubsection{Appending Hooks to Environments}
% \label{sec:alignment-hooks}
% \DescribeMacro{\AtBeginEnvironment} Once environments corresponding
% to texts to be aligned have been defined, it is advisable to use the
% \cs{AtBeginEnvironment}\marg{environment}\marg{code} command that is
% provided by the \pkg{etoolbox} package\footnote{This package is
% loaded by \pkg{ekdosis}.} to further adjust languages, hyphenation
% rules, and/or fonts to be applied in each environment. To return to
% the example provided above, once \cs{SetAlignment} has been
% used, the languages can be set as follows:---
% 
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
\AtBeginEnvironment{latin}{\selectlanguage{latin}}
\AtBeginEnvironment{english}{\selectlanguage{english}}
\AtBeginEnvironment{french}{\selectlanguage{french}}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \section{Laying Out the Apparatus Criticus }
% \label{sec:apparatus-layout}
%
% \subsection{General Hooks}
% \label{sec:general-hooks}
% Some hooks are shared by all layers of notes that are inserted in
% the apparatus criticus (e.g. sources, testimonia, variant readings
% \emph{\&c.})
%
% \DescribeMacro{\SetHooks}
% \cs{SetHooks}\marg{csv list of hooks} can be used either in
% the preamble or at any point of the document. The list of accepted
% hooks at the time of writing follows:---\\
% \DescribeOption{appfontsize} |appfontsize|$=$\meta{command}
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: \footnotesize}\\
% This option sets the size of the font to be used in the whole
% apparatus criticus. By default, it is the same as the size used for
% footnotes.\\
% \DescribeOption{refnumstyle} |refnumstyle|$=$\meta{command}
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: \bfseries}\\
% |refnumstyle| can be used to set the family, series or shape of the
% font used to print references to line numbers in the apparatus
% criticus. By default, numbers are printed in bold face. As an
% example, |refnumstyle=\normalfont| will have them printed in the
% font and shape selected by default for the
% document, while |refnumstyle=\bfseries\itshape| will have them
% printed in bold and italic.\\
% \DescribeOption{postrefnum} |postrefnum|$=$\meta{command \textbar\
% chars}\hfill\tcboxverb{Default: ~}\\
% |postrefnum| can be used to set what immediately follows the
% reference to line numbers. By default, it is |~|, namely an
% unbreakable space. As an example, |postrefnum=\hskip 0.5em| will
% insert a \unit[0.5]{em} space between the numerals and the beginning
% of all subsequent notes.
%
% \subsection{Single-Layer Apparatus Criticus}
% \label{sec:single-layer-app}
% \paragraph{Specific Commands}
% Single-layer apparatus criticus can be laid out in a variety of
% ways with the following specialized commands, all of which can be
% used in the preamble or at any point of the document:---
%
% \DescribeMacro{\SetLTRapp}
% \DescribeMacro{\SetRTLapp}
% \cs{SetLTRapp} and \cs{SetRTLapp} are two argument-less commands to
% set the direction of the apparatus criticus, either left-to-right or
% right-to-left.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\SetSeparator} \cs{SetSeparator}\marg{separator} is
% used to change the separator between lemma texts and variants
% readings. By default, the separator is a closing square bracket
% followed by a space (\verb*+] +).
%
% \DescribeMacro{\SetBeginApparatus}
% \cs{SetBeginApparatus}\marg{characters\textbar commands} can be used
% to append \meta{characters} or \meta{commands} at the beginning of
% the apparatus block. By default, nothing is appended. For instance,
% |\SetBeginApparatus{\textbf{Apparatus:}}| will append
% \enquote{\textbf{Apparatus:}} at the beginning of the apparatus
% block, while |\SetBeginApparatus{\hskip 1em}| will set an
% indentation of one em.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\SetEndApparatus}
% \cs{SetEndApparatus}\marg{characters} can be used to append
% \meta{characters} at the end of the apparatus block. By default,
% nothing is appended. As an example of use, |\SetEndApparatus{.}|
% will have a period printed at the end of the apparatus as it is
% customary in some editions.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\SetUnitDelimiter}
% \cs{SetUnitDelimiter}\marg{delimiter} can be used to set the
% delimiter between entries in the apparatus criticus. By default,
% there is no delimiter except a simple space. \meta{delimiter} can be
% a broad space (such as |\hskip 0.75em| for instance as in the OCT
% series) or the divider-sign (‖, as in the Budé series).
%
% \DescribeMacro{\SetDefaultRule}
% By default, \pkg{ekdosis} draws a separating line between the
% edition text and the apparatus criticus. This line is initially
% defined as
% |\rule{0.4\columnwidth}{0.4pt}|. \cs{SetDefaultRule}\marg{line
% definition} can be used in the preamble or at any point of the
% document to change the default setting. Leaving this argument empty
% as in \cs{SetDefaultRule}|{}| removes the line.
%
% \paragraph{General Command}
% \DescribeMacro{\SetApparatus} \cs{SetApparatus}\marg{csv list of
% apparatus settings}\label{ref:apparatus-settings-b}\\
% Finally, all the settings described above can also be collected in
% the argument of \cs{SetApparatus}. \cs{SetApparatus} accepts the
% following list of comma-separated |key=value| options:---\\
% \DescribeOption{direction} |direction|$=$\verb+LR|RL+
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: LR}\\
% The writing direction of the apparatus criticus, either
% left-to-right (|LR|) or right-to-left (|LR|).\\
% \DescribeOption{sep} |sep|$=$\meta{command \textbar\ chars}
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: ]␣}\\
% The separator between lemma texts and variant readings.\\
% \DescribeOption{delim} |delim|$=$\meta{delimiter}
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: not set}\\
% The delimiter between entries in the apparatus criticus. As said
% above, there is no default delimiter except a simple space.\\
% \DescribeOption{bhook} |bhook|$=$\meta{characters\textbar commands}
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: empty}\\
% The characters or commands to be appended at the beginning of the
% apparatus block.\\
% \DescribeOption{ehook} |ehook|$=$\meta{characters}
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: empty}\\
% The characters to be appended at the end of the apparatus block.\\
% \DescribeOption{rule} |rule|$=$\meta{command}\verb+|+|none|
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: \rule{0.4\columnwidth}{0.4pt}}\\
% As described above, |rule| is used to draw the separating line
% between the edition text and the apparatus criticus. |rule=none| can
% also be used to remove the line.\\
% \DescribeOption{norule}\hfill\tcboxverb{Default: not set}\\
% |norule| does not accept any value and has the same effect as
% |rule=none|.\label{ref:apparatus-settings-e}
%
% As an example, an apparatus criticus with references to line numbers
% printed in normal font, a colon as a separator between lemma texts
% and variant readings, a broad space as a delimiter between entries
% and a \unit[0.7]{in} line above could be laid out as follows:---
%
% \label{ex:single-layer-app-layout}
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
\SetHooks{
  refnumstyle=\normalfont
}
\SetApparatus{
  sep={: },
  delim=\hskip 1em,
  rule=\rule{0.7in}{0.4pt}
}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \paragraph{Footnote Separator}
% \DescribeMacro{\footnoteruletrue} \DescribeMacro{\footnoterulefalse}
% As already seen above, \pkg{ekdosis} takes care of drawing a
% separating line between the edition text and the apparatus
% criticus. Therefore, it may be not desirable to have the standard
% \LaTeX\ \enquote{footnoterule} printed on every page where regular
% footnotes are found. \cs{footnoterulefalse} removes it while
% \cs{footnoteruletrue} leaves it untouched. The latter is set by
% default.
%
% \subsection{Multiple-Layer Apparatus Criticus}
% \label{sec:multilayer-apparatus}
% As said above in \vref{it:multilayer-feature}, \pkg{ekdosis} can
% print edition texts equipped with multiple-layer apparatus
% criticus. To take an example, most classical editions provide at
% least two layers of notes: one to collect references to testimonia
% or parallel passages (apparatus testium) and the other to record
% variant readings (the apparatus criticus \emph{stricto sensu}). The
% former is always printed above the latter.
%
% \danger The default single-layer apparatus criticus that is
% described above in \vref{sec:single-layer-app} is called |default|
% internally. If any additional layer of notes be declared in the
% preamble, this |default| layer must be included in the list of
% declared layers.\\
% \DescribeMacro{\SetDefaultApparatus}\label{ref:ekd-default-app}
% \cs{SetDefaultApparatus}\marg{name} can be used at any point of
% the document to change the default name that is used by
% \pkg{ekdosis}.
%
% \subsubsection{Declaring Additional Layers}
% \label{sec:declaring-layers}
% \DescribeMacro{\DeclareApparatus}
% \cs{DeclareApparatus}\marg{name}\oarg{csv list of apparatus
% settings} is a preamble-only command. As a mandatory argument, it
% takes the name of the new layer of notes to be inserted in the
% apparatus block. Declared layers are then printed one below the
% other in the exact same order as they are declared in the
% preamble. Therefore, one additional layer meant to print the
% testimonia above the variant readings (apparatus testium) can be
% declared as follows:---
% 
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}{latex}
% preamble:
\DeclareApparatus{testium}
\DeclareApparatus{default}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% In this example, |testium| is a new name for |default|, as said
% just above, is already known to \pkg{ekdosis} and used as the
% default layer of notes. Furthermore, as |testium| is declared before
% |default|, \pkg{ekdosis} will print the testimonia at the top of the
% apparatus block.
%
% \subsubsection{Laying Out Layers With The Optional Argument
% of \cs{DeclareApparatus}}
% \label{sec:layout-layers}
% \DescribeOption{direction}
% \DescribeOption{sep}
% \DescribeOption{delim}
% \DescribeOption{bhook}
% \DescribeOption{ehook}
% \DescribeOption{rule}
% \DescribeOption{norule}
% With regard to layout, any declared layer inherits the defaut values
% described above in \vref{sec:single-layer-app}. That said, as the
% optional argument of \cs{DeclareApparatus} accepts the exact same
% |key-value| options as \cs{SetApparatus} described
% \vpagerefrange{ref:apparatus-settings-b}{ref:apparatus-settings-e},
% \pkg{ekdosis} provides a straightforward mechanism to have any layer
% printed in a distinct layout.
%
% To return to the example provided
% \vpageref[above]{ex:single-layer-app-layout}, one could keep the
% same settings as above for the variant readings, declare an
% apparatus testium with a closing square bracket as a separator and
% finally remove the line between the testimonia and the variant
% readings like so:---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
\SetHooks{
  refnumstyle=\normalfont
}
\DeclareApparatus{testium}[
  sep={] },
  delim=\hskip 1em,
  rule=\rule{0.7in}{0.4pt}
]
\DeclareApparatus{default}[
  sep={: },
  delim=\hskip 1em,
  norule
]
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
% 
% \paragraph{Limiting the Number of Entries per Page}
% \label{ref:maxentries}
% In some instances, it can be useful to set a limit to the number of
% entries per page that a given layer of critical notes may accept,
% notably when entries are so abundant in number that \pkg{ekdosis}
% may oscillate indefinitely between different sets of page decisions
% without being able to settle down.\\
% \DescribeOption{maxentries} |maxentries|=\meta{n} (where $n \geq
% 10$) \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: not set}\\
% If |maxentries|$=$\meta{n} be set, then \pkg{ekdosis} will issue
% \cs{pagebreak} (namely \cs{penalty}|-10000|) just after the
% \emph{n\textsuperscript{th}} entry has been inserted in the layer of
% the apparatus criticus this option is related to. As a result, the
% page will actually break at the end of the current line. The
% particulars of this technique will be discussed below in
% \vref{sec:tricks-of-trade}.
%
% \section{Inserting Notes in Multiple-Layer Apparatus}
% \label{sec:notes-in-multilayer-app}
% As said above in \vref{sec:multilayer-apparatus}, \pkg{ekdosis}
% initially sets one layer of notes that is called the
% \textooquote|default|\textcoquote\ layer. As a result, any note
% inserted within the argument of \cs{app}|{}| as described
% \vpageref{ref:app-cmd} will go into that layer of the apparatus,
% unless \cs{SetDefaultApparatus} has been used to set another
% name for the default layer (see above
% \vpageref{ref:ekd-default-app}).
%
% \subsection{Variant Readings}
% \label{sec:variant-readings}
% In most cases, all variant readings go into the
% \textooquote|default|\textcoquote\ layer of the apparatus
% criticus. But in some other cases, for example when the manuscripts
% used refer to different recensions, it may happen that one wishes to
% record the related variants in separate layers. As already described
% \vpageref{ref:app-type}, the |type| optional argument of the
% \cs{app} command can be used to insert lemma texts and associated
% variants in any other \enquote*{declared} layer of the apparatus
% criticus.
%
% The following example assumes that some edition text is received in
% two different recensions and the variant readings that belong to the
% first recension are recorded in the default layer of notes while
% those of the second recension are to be printed in a second layer,
% below the default one. First, both layers must be declared in the
% preamble in sequence, like so:---
% 
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
\DeclareApparatus{default} % default layer
\DeclareApparatus{rec2} % additional layer below the default one
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% If one wishes to refer to |rec1| as the default layer, then
% \cs{SetDefaultApparatus} must be used, like so:---
% 
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
\SetDefaultApparatus{rec1}
\DeclareApparatus{rec1} % new layer set as default
\DeclareApparatus{rec2} % additional layer below the default one
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% Then, whatever option has been chosen, lemma texts and variants
% inserted with \cs{app}|{}| will go into the upper, default layer of
% notes, while those inserted with \cs{app}|[type=rec2]{}| will go
% into the lower one:---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
Some \app{
  \lem{word}
  \rdg{reading}
} to go into the default layer of notes.

Some \app[type=rec2]{
  \lem{note}
  \rdg{comment}
} to be recorded as part of the second recension.
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% At any rate, |type=default| or |type=rec1|, depending on what has
% been chosen, must be used if the editor wishes to retain that
% information in the \texttt{TEI xml} output file.
%
% \subsection{Other Notes for Comments, Sources or Testimonia}
% \label{ref:type-note}
% Additional layers of notes can be used to print short comments or to
% record references to texts quoted by the author of the edited text
% or references to the edited text by other authors or
% translators. The former set is called an \emph{apparatus fontium}
% while the latter is called an \emph{apparatus testium}.
%
% \danger From a technical standpoint, these notes are very different
% from the short editorial notes inserted between lemma texts and
% variant readings that have been described above
% \vpageref{ref:editorial-notes}. However, for the sake of consistency
% with \texttt{TEI xml} encoding, \pkg{ekdosis} uses the same command
% \cs{note} to insert both kinds of notes.
%
% \danger One must also keep in mind that the notes that are described
% in this section refer either to a single word or to a span of
% text. By consequence, as boundaries must always be set outside spans
% of text, notes must be inserted immediately before the word or words
% they are related to. As a result of this rule, all spaces subsequent
% to \cs{note} are ignored.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\note} \cs{note}\oarg{options}\marg{text}\\
% As said above, \cs{note}, when found outside \cs{app}|{}|, is used
% to insert in additional layers of the apparatus short comments or
% references to texts quoted or cited in the edition text. It accepts
% the following comma-separated list of |key-value| optional
% arguments:---\\
% \DescribeOption{type} |type|$=$\meta{type}\\
% |type| is used to specify the name of the layer where the note is to
% be printed.\footnote{See \vref{sec:declaring-layers} to learn how to
% declare and lay out new layers of notes.}\\
% \DescribeOption{sep} |sep|$=$\meta{command \textbar\ chars}\\
% The separator between the lemma text and the contents of the note.\\
% \DescribeOption{nosep} |nosep|$=$\verb+true|false+\\
% This named argument does not need a value as it defaults to |true|
% if it is used. Obviously, |nosep| removes the separator mentioned
% above.\\
% \DescribeOption{lem} |lem|$=$\meta{lemma text}\\
% |lem| is the span of text the note is about. It may consist of one
% or more words, or of an abridged lemma text.\\
% \DescribeOption{labelb} |labelb|$=$\meta{label}
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Mandatory}\\
% |labelb| is the unique label to serve as a reference for the point
% immediately preceding the lemma text.  \danger |labelb| is used by
% \pkg{ekdosis} to print the line numbers in the apparatus criticus
% and to set the |left()| XPointer should \texttt{TEI} output be
% required. Therefore, it must be specified. Otherwise, \pkg{ekdosis}
% will issue an error message.\\
% \DescribeOption{labele} |labele|$=$\meta{label}\\
% |labele| is the unique label to serve as a reference for the point
% immediately following the lemma text. Contrary to |labelb|, |labele|
% may be left unspecified if the note is only about one word. If it is
% about a span, then |labele| ought to be specified.\\
% \DescribeMacro{\linelabel} \cs{linelabel}\marg{label}\\
% If |labele|$=$\meta{some\_label} be specified in the optional
% argument of \cs{note}, \cs{linelabel}\marg{some\allowbreak\_label}
% must be inserted immediately after the span of text that the note is
% about so that \pkg{ekdosis} can locate the exact point where the
% lemma text addressed by the note ends, like so:---
% 
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
% Preamble:
% \DeclareApparatus{fontium}[
%         delim=\hskip0.75em,
%         bhook=\textbf{Sources:},
%         ehook=.]
% \DeclareApparatus{default}[
%         delim=\hskip0.75em,
%         ehook=.]
% Document:
\begin{ekdosis}
  The oldest monument of the Germans is their language, which, before
  untold centuries, was the companion of their travels from central
  Asia; a language, copious, elastic, inviting self-explaining
  combinations and independent development; lending itself alike to
  daily life and imagination, to description and abstract thought.
  \note[type=fontium, labelb=61e, labele=62a, lem={They
    had... slave}]{Waitz, \emph{Deutsche Verfassungs Geschichte},
    i. 86} They had a class of nobles, but their tongue knew no word
  for slave.\linelabel{62a}\footnote{George Bancroft, \emph{History of
      the United States from the Discovery of the American Continent},
    II.61--2.}
\end{ekdosis}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \needspace{5\baselineskip}
% PDF output:---
% \medskip
% \resetlinenumber
% \begin{alignment}[flush,tcols=1,texts=specimen,apparatus=specimen]
%   \begin{specimen}
%     The oldest monument of the Germans is their language, which,
%     before untold centuries, was the companion of their travels from
%     central Asia; a language, copious, elastic, inviting
%     self-explaining combinations and independent development;
%     lending itself alike to daily life and imagination, to
%     description and abstract thought.  \note[type=fontium,
%     labelb=61e, labele=62a, lem={They had... slave}]{Waitz,
%     \emph{Deutsche Verfassungs Geschichte}, i. 86} They had a class
%     of nobles, but their tongue knew no word for
%     slave.\linelabel{62a}\footnote{George Bancroft, \emph{History of
%     the United States from the Discovery of the American Continent},
%     II.61--2.}
%   \end{specimen}
% \end{alignment}
%
% \texttt{TEI xml} output:---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{xml}
<p>The oldest monument of the Germans is their language,
which, before untold centuries, was the companion of their
travels from central Asia; a language, copious, elastic,
inviting self-explaining combinations and independent
development; lending itself alike to daily life and
imagination, to description and abstract thought. 
<note type="fontium" target="#range(right(61e),left(62a))">Waitz, 
<emph>Deutsche Verfassungs Geschichte</emph>, i. 86</note>
<anchor xml:id="61e" />They had a class of nobles, but
their tongue knew no word for slave.
<anchor xml:id="#62a" />
<note place="bottom">George Bancroft, 
<emph>History of the United States from the Discovery of
the American Continent</emph>, II.61--2.</note></p>
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \paragraph{\cs{note} or \cs{linelabel} inside \cs{lem}}
% It may happen that \cs{note} or \cs{linelabel} commands be found
% inside the argument of \cs{lem}. Obviously, inserting such commands
% in the apparatus criticus in print makes no sense and will lead to
% an error. The solution is to insert in the value of the |alt|
% optional argument of \cs{lem} a duplicate of the lemma text devoid
% of those commands, like so:---
% 
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
This is some \app{
  \lem[alt=dummy]{\note[type=fontium, labelb=bnote, labele=enote,
    lem=dummy... command]{Text of the note}
    dummy}
  \rdg{pseudo}}
text to demonstrate how to insert a note in the argument of the
\emph{lem} command.\linelabel{enote}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \needspace{5\baselineskip}
% PDF output:---
% \medskip
% \resetlinenumber
% \begin{alignment}[flush,tcols=1,texts=specimen,apparatus=specimen]
%   \begin{specimen}
% This is some \app{
%   \lem[alt=dummy]{\note[type=fontium, labelb=bnote, labele=enote,
%     lem=dummy... command]{Text of the note}
%     dummy}
%   \rdg{pseudo}}
% text to demonstrate how to insert a note in the argument of the
% \emph{lem} command.\linelabel{enote}
%   \end{specimen}
% \end{alignment}
%
% \texttt{TEI xml} output:---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}{xml}
<p>This is some 
<app>
  <lem>
  <anchor xml:id="bnote" />dummy</lem>
  <note type="fontium"
  target="#range(right(bnote),left(enote))">Text of the
  note</note>
  <rdg>pseudo</rdg>
</app>text to demonstrate how to insert a note in the
argument of the 
<emph>lem</emph>command.
<anchor xml:id="#enote" /></p>
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% As can be seen from the \texttt{TEI xml} output above, the span of
% text the note is about has been carefully delimited by two anchors
% (ll.~4 and 12), the first of which falls within |<lem>| (l.~4), but
% \pkg{ekdosis} has taken care of moving the note itself out of this
% element (ll.~5--7). Otherwise, the \texttt{TEI} output would not be
% valid.
%
% \section{Lineation Settings}
% \label{sec:lineation}
% \danger \pkg{ekdosis} uses \pkg{lineno} internally for line
% numbering.\footcite{lineno} But it must be noted that \pkg{ekdosis}
% strictly prohibits the \enquote{pagewise} mode of operation that is
% provided by \pkg{lineno}. As a result of this hinderance, all
% \enquote{margin switching} functions of \pkg{lineno} are disabled
% within the environments that are specific to \pkg{ekdosis},
% viz. \env{ekdosis} and \env{alignment}.
%
% That said, \pkg{ekdosis} provides equivalents of its own to handle
% the line numbers the same way as \pkg{lineno}'s \enquote{pagewise}
% mode of operation does.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\SetLineation} \cs{SetLineation}\marg{csv list of
% options} may be used in the preamble or at any point of the document
% to set lineation preferences. Its argument processes the |key=value|
% options that follow:---\\
% \DescribeOption{lineation} |lineation|$=$\verb+page|document+
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: document}\\
% |lineation=document| has the lines numbered continuously throughout
% the document while |lineation=page| instructs \pkg{ekdosis} that the
% numbering should start afresh at the top of each page.\\
% \DescribeOption{modulo} |modulo| \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: not set}\\
% |modulo| does not accept any value. When this option is set, every
% fifth line is numbered.\\
% \DescribeOption{modulonum} |modulonum|$=$\emph{n} (where \emph{n} is
% an integer)\hfill\tcboxverb{Default: not set}\\
% |modulonum| allows to modify the interval between the numbers that
% are printed. |modulo| must be set for this option to have effect. As
% examples, |modulo, modulonum=3| has every third line numbered and
% |modulonum=1| disables modulo numbering.\\
% \DescribeOption{margin} |margin|$=$\verb+right|left|inner|outer+
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: left}\\
% |margin| sets the margin in which the line numbers are to be
% printed.\\
% \DescribeOption{numbers} |numbers|$=$\verb+elided|full+
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: elided}\\
% This option only has effect on the numbers that are printed in the
% apparatus criticus. |numbers=elided| applies on spans of numbers and
% elides the last number of a range to the fewest number of figures
% possible\---viz. 35--7, 129--31 \emph{\&c.}\---without eliding
% digits in the group 10 to 19 in each hundred\---viz. 17--19, 115--18
% \emph{\&c.} |numbers=full| leaves the numbers untouched.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\innerlinenumbers} \DescribeMacro{\outerlinenumbers}
% \cs{innerlinenumbers} and \cs{outerlinenumbers} are equivalent to
% \cs{SetLineation}|{numb|\allowbreak|ers=outer}| and
% \cs{SetLineation}|{numbers=inner}| respectively. Both commands are
% complementary to \cs{rightlinenumbers} and \cs{leftlinenumbers}
% already provided by the \pkg{lineno} package.
%
% \paragraph{Useful Lineation Commands}
% As implied above, pretty much all commands that are provided by the
% \enquote{running} mode of operation of the \pkg{lineno} package will
% work with \pkg{ekdosis}, notably the following:---\\
% \DescribeMacro{\modulolinenumbers} \cs{modulolinenumbers}\oarg{n}
% can be used to enable modulo line numbering as described above.\\
% \DescribeMacro{\resetlinenumber} \cs{resetlinenumber}\oarg{n} resets
% the line number to one or to \emph{n} if specified.\\
% \DescribeMacro{\linenumberfont}
% \cs{renewcommand}|{\linenumberfont}|\marg{commands} can be used to
% set the font used for the line numbers that are printed in the
% margins. By default, the definition is
% \cs{normalfont}\cs{footnotesize}.\\
% \DescribeMacro{\linenumbersep} \cs{linenumbersep} is the distance
% between the numbers and the margin. By default, this distance is set
% to \unit[10]{pt}. It can be redefined like so:
% \cs{setlength}\cs{linenumbersep}\marg{length}.\\
% \DescribeMacro{\linelabel} \DescribeMacro{\lineref}
% \cs{linelabel}\marg{label} sets a line label that can be referred to
% with \cs{lineref}\marg{label}.
%
% The reader is invited to refer to the documentation of the
% \pkg{lineno} package for more information.
%
% As an example, what follows has every fifth line number printed in
% the inner margins. Additionally, the numbering shall start afresh at
% the top of each page:---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
\SetLineation{
  lineation=page,
  modulo,
  margin=inner
}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \section{Languages}
% \label{sec:languages}
% \danger \pkg{ekdosis} is fully compatible with \pkg{babel}.
% \enquote{Fully compatible} means that all features provided by
% \pkg{babel}, including language switching commands, are supported by
% \pkg{ekdosis}. \pkg{ekdosis} is also compatible with
% \pkg{polyglossia} with one notable exception: \pkg{luabidi}, which
% \pkg{polyglossia} loads for languages written from right to left, is
% not supported by \pkg{ekdosis}, and most probably never will
% be. That said, as far as the author could see, single-layer
% apparatus, as described in \vref{sec:single-layer-app}, can be
% typeset within the Arabic environment that is provided by
% \pkg{polyglossia}. Unfortunately, the same cannot be said for
% multi-layer apparatus.
%
% Whether \pkg{babel} or \pkg{polyglossia} is used, \pkg{ekdosis}
% automatically applies the current language to the entries of the
% apparatus criticus, including the fonts that may have been
% associated to the languages in the preamble. In this respect, as
% \pkg{polyglossia} can use the same language switching commands as
% \pkg{babel},\footcite[See][3.2 \pno~14]{polyglossia} the general
% advice given above in \vref{sec:alignment-hooks} applies in all
% cases.
%
% \subsection{Languages Written From Right to Left}
% \label{sec:rtl-languages}
% As said above, \pkg{polyglossia} is not supported by \pkg{ekdosis}
% for languages that are written and read from right to left, like
% Arabic, Hebrew or Syriac. However, as \pkg{babel} is supported and
% can be loaded concurrently with \pkg{polyglossia}, an easy way is to
% use \pkg{babel} to print such languages.
%
% \danger The reader is invited to refer to and become acquainted with
% the relevant parts of the documentation of the \pkg{babel}
% package.\footcite{babel}
%
% \paragraph{\pkg{babel} Only}
% In the following example, \pkg{babel} is used exclusively to set
% three different languages: Arabic, ancient Greek and English:---
%
% \captof{Multilingual editions with \pkg{babel} only}
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}{latex}
\usepackage{fontspec}

\usepackage[greek.ancient,english]{babel}
\babelprovide[onchar=fonts]{arabic}

\babelfont{rm}{Old Standard}
\babelfont[greek]{rm}[RawFeature={+ss05;+ss06}]{Old Standard}
\babelfont[*arabic]{rm}{Amiri}

\babeltags{ancientgreek = greek}
\newcommand{\sg}[1]{\textancientgreek{#1}}

\newcommand{\RL}[1]{\bgroup\textdir TRT#1\egroup}
\newenvironment{Arabic}{\par\pardir TRT\textdir TRT}{\par}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \begin{remarks}
% \item As can be seen, \pkg{fontspec} has been loaded before
%   \pkg{babel}. To the author's knowledge, this gives better results
%   when \cs{babelfont} is used.
% \item Line~3 loads \pkg{babel} and instructs it to use English as
%   the default language and ancient Greek as a second optional
%   language. The built-in |bidi| mechanism provided by \pkg{babel} is
%   not enabled. As a result, specific language switching commands for
%   Arabic must be defined just as it must be for every other
%   language.
% \item Line~4 does not load any Arabic, but instructs \pkg{babel}
%   that it should use the Arabic font that is set below with
%   \cs{babelfont} whenever an Arabic letter is encountered.
% \item Lines~6--8 select the fonts: |Old Standard| is the default
%   font to be used for Roman shape (l.~6); the same font is used for
%   Greek, with some additional Open Type features enabled; finally,
%   the |Amiri| font is used for Arabic.
% \item Lines~10--11 define so-called \enquote{tags} for easier access
%   to ancient Greek through \cs{begin}|{ancient|\allowbreak|greek}|
%   \dots\ \cs{end}|{ancientgreek}| for running paragraphs and
%   \cs{textancientgreek}\marg{text} for short insertions of Greek in
%   English text. \cs{sg}\marg{text} is just a shorthand for this
%   latter command.
% \item Finally, lines~13--14 define simple language switching
%   commands for Arabic. As can be seen, no commands other than the
%   \LuaTeX\ primitives \cs{pardir} and \cs{textdir} have been used
%   for \pkg{babel} already takes care of selecting the Arabic
%   font. \cs{RL} is for short insertions of Arabic words in English
%   paragraphs while \cs{begin}|{Arabic}| \dots\ \cs{end}|{Arabic}| is
%   for running paragraphs of Arabic text.
% \end{remarks}
%
% \paragraph{Changing the Writing Direction}
% \DescribeMacro{\setRL} \DescribeMacro{\setLR} \cs{setRL} and
% \cs{setLR} are two argument-less commands provided by \pkg{ekdosis}
% that can be used to change the writing direction of running
% paragraphs. The former sets the direction from right to left and the
% latter form left to right. If \pkg{babel} has been set as above,
% \cs{setRL} \dots\ \cs{setLR} can be used in place of
% \cs{begin}|{Arabic}| \dots\ \cs{end}|{Arabic}|.
% 
% \paragraph{\pkg{polyglossia} Associated With \cs{babelprovide}}
% What follows illustrates how \pkg{babel} can be used conjointly with
% \pkg{polyglossia} for the same three languages as above without
% having to load \pkg{luabidi}:---
%
% \captof{Multilingual editions with \pkg{babel} and
% \pkg{polyglossia}}
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}{latex}
\usepackage{fontspec}

\usepackage{babel}
\babelprovide[onchar=fonts]{arabic}

\setmainfont{Old Standard}
\newfontfamily\greekfont{Old Standard}[RawFeature={+ss05;+ss06}]
\babelfont[*arabic]{rm}{Amiri}

\usepackage{polyglossia}
\setdefaultlanguage{english}
\setotherlanguage[variant=ancient]{greek}

\newcommand{\textarabic}[1]{\bgroup\textdir TRT#1\egroup}
\newenvironment{Arabic}{\par\pardir TRT\textdir TRT}{\par}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \begin{remarks}
% \item Line~3 just loads \pkg{babel} with no default language.
% \item Lines~4 and 8 are used to have the Arabic font automatically
%   selected as above.
% \item Lines~14--15 define the exact language switching commands that
%   would have been defined if \pkg{polyglossia} and \pkg{luabidi} had
%   been used for Arabic.
% \end{remarks}
%
% As one can see, the important points about languages written from
% right to left are to use \pkg{babel} only to select the Arabic
% fonts, avoid using the bidirectional mechanism it provides and
% define commands and environments that use only \LuaTeX\ primitives
% to set the writing direction. Then, an Arabic edition text\---to
% continue with this example\---can be entered as plainly as
% follows:---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false,escapeinside=++]{latex}
\begin{ekdosis}
  \begin{Arabic}
    +\txarb{إِنَّ أَبِي كَانَ مِنَ}+ \app{
      \lem{+\txarb{ٱلْمُقَاتِلَةِ}+}
      \rdg{+\txarb{ٱلْمُقَاتِلِينَ}+}
      } +\txarb{وَ كَانَتْ أُمِّي مِنْ عُظَمَآءِ بُيُوتِ ٱلزَّمَازِمَةِ۔}+
  \end{Arabic}
\end{ekdosis}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% It should be reminded that the writing direction of the apparatus
% criticus itself is independent of that of the edition text and must
% be set either with \cs{Set(LTR{\textbar}RTL)app} or with the
% |direction| optional argument of \cs{SetApparatus} for single-layer
% apparatus criticus, or by means of \cs{DeclareApparatus} for
% multiple-layer apparatus criticus.\footnote{See above
% \vref{sec:single-layer-app} (single-layer apparatus criticus) and
% \vref{sec:multilayer-apparatus} (multiple-layer apparatus
% criticus).}
%
% \needspace{5\baselineskip}
% The PDF output with left-to-right apparatus criticus follows:---
% \medskip
% \resetlinenumber
% \begin{alignment}[flush,tcols=1,texts=specimen,apparatus=specimen]
%   \begin{specimen}
%     \begin{arab}[fullvoc]
%       'inna 'abI kAna mina \app[type=ltr]{
%       \lem{'l-muqAtilaTi}
%       \rdg{'l-muqAtilIna}}
%       wa-kAnat 'ummI min `u.zamA'i buyUti 'l-zamAzimaTi.
%     \end{arab}
%   \end{specimen}
% \end{alignment}
%
% \needspace{5\baselineskip}
% And here follows the PDF output with right-to-left apparatus
% criticus:---
% \medskip \resetlinenumber
% \begin{alignment}[flush,tcols=1,texts=specimen,apparatus=specimen]
%   \begin{specimen}
%     \begin{arab}[fullvoc]
%       'inna 'abI kAna mina \app[type=rtl]{
%       \lem{'l-muqAtilaTi}
%       \rdg{'l-muqAtilIna}}
%       wa-kAnat 'ummI min `u.zamA'i buyUti 'l-zamAzimaTi.
%     \end{arab}
%   \end{specimen}
% \end{alignment}
%
% \subsection{Using \pkg{arabluatex}}
% \label{sec:using-arabluatex}
% \pkg{arabluatex} is a \hologo{LuaLaTeX} package that provides
% commands and environments which return Arabic writing from an ASCII
% transliteration (either Arab\TeX\ or Buckwalter
% scheme).\footcite{arabluatex} It is particularly well-suited for
% complex documents such as critical editions where a lot of commands
% intertwine with Arabic writing. \pkg{arabluatex} can output Unicode
% Arabic in the same modes as \pkg{arabtex}\footcite{arabtex} or in
% different accepted standards of romanization. It is also able to
% produce a duplicate of the original |.tex| source file in which all
% |arabtex| or |buckwalter| strings are replaced with Unicode
% equivalents, either in Arabic script or in any accepted standard of
% transliteration.\footcite[\mkbibquote{Exporting Unicode Arabic
% to an External File}]{arabluatex}
%
% \pkg{arabluatex} is fully supported by \pkg{ekdosis}. The following
% example illustrates how \pkg{arabluatex} and \pkg{ekdosis} interact
% with each other to produce distinct \texttt{TEI xml} outputs from a
% single |.tex| source file:---
%
% \captof{\pkg{ekdosis} and \pkg{arabluatex}}[\label{lst:arabluatex-ekd}]
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}{latex}
% Preamble:
% load ekdosis and ask for TEI xml output:
\usepackage[teiexport]{ekdosis}
% load arabluatex and request a LaTeX ouput with Unicode Arabic:
\usepackage[export,fullvoc]{arabluatex}

% document:
\begin{arabexport} % export arabtex strings to Unicode Arabic
  \begin{ekdosis}
    \begin{arab}
      'inna 'abI kAna mina 
      \app{
        \lem{'l-muqAtilaTi}
        \rdg{'l-muqAtilIna}
      }
      wa-kAnat 'ummI min `u.zamA'i buyUti 'l-zamAzimaTi.
    \end{arab}
  \end{ekdosis}
\end{arabexport}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \needspace{7\baselineskip}
% The PDF output with left-to-right apparatus criticus is of course
% the same as above:---
% \resetlinenumber
% \begin{alignment}[flush,tcols=1,texts=specimen,apparatus=specimen]
%   \begin{specimen}
%     \begin{arab}[fullvoc]
%       'inna 'abI kAna mina \app[type=ltr]{
%       \lem{'l-muqAtilaTi}
%       \rdg{'l-muqAtilIna}}
%       wa-kAnat 'ummI min `u.zamA'i buyUti 'l-zamAzimaTi.
%     \end{arab}
%   \end{specimen}
% \end{alignment}
%
% However, assuming that the source file is called |source.tex|,
% \pkg{ekdosis} produces as instructed from this file an additional
% |source-tei.xml| as follows:---
% 
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{xml}
<p xml:lang="ar-Latn" type="transliterated"
subtype="arabtex">'inna 'abI kAna mina 
<app>
  <lem>'l-muqAtilaTi</lem>
  <rdg>'l-muqAtilIna</rdg>
</app>wa-kAnat 'ummI min `u.zamA'i buyUti
'l-zamAzimaTi.</p>
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% At the same time, \pkg{arabluatex} is instructed to produce on its
% own from the same |source.tex| an additional |source_out.tex| in
% which all |arabtex| strings found within \cs{begin}|{arabexport}|
% \dots\ \cs{end}|{arabexport}| (see \vref{lst:arabluatex-ekd},
% ll.~9--19) are replaced with full-vocalized Arabic Unicode
% script. Finally, compiling this latter file produces the following
% |sample-arabic_out-tei.xml| an extract of which follows:---
% 
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false,escapeinside=++]{xml}
<p xml:lang="arb">+\txarb{إِنَّ أَبِي كَانَ مِنَ}+ 
<app>
  <lem>+\txarb{ٱلْمُقَاتِلَةِ}+</lem>
  <rdg>+\txarb{ٱلْمُقَاتِلِينَ}+</rdg>
</app>+\txarb{وَكَانَتْ أُمِّي مِنْ عُظَمَآءِ بُيُوتِ}+
+\txarb{ٱلزَّمَازِمَةِ.}+</p>
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% The reader will find the full |arabic-sample.tex| source file with
% instructions in \vref{sec:arabic-sample}, and is invited to refer to
% the documentation of the \pkg{arabluatex} package for more
% information on the way to use its Arabic environments and built-in
% functions dedicated to export |arabtex| ASCII strings to
% Unicode.\footcite{arabluatex}
%
% \section{Divisions of the Body}
% \label{sec:body-divisions}
% The features that are described in this section call for one general
% remark.  \pkg{ekdosis} is designed to figure out where any \LaTeX\
% command that is converted to a \texttt{TEI} opening element allowed
% to nest recursively, such as |<div>|, |<lg>| and the like, is to be
% closed, even though there is no explicit indication of the point
% where the closure occurs. Thoroughly scanning \LaTeX\ source files
% with \textsf{Lua} functions which involve complex string matching
% and recursions was required, as \LaTeX\ \enquote*{open} commands
% such as \cs{chapter} or \cs{section} only act as milestones,
% contrary to \texttt{TEI} elements.
% 
% \danger It must be noted that the two styles described hereinafter
% are mutually exclusive. \texttt{TEI xml} forbids that both be
% combined within a single |<body>| element.\footnote{See
% \url{https://tei-c.org/release/doc/tei-p5-doc/en/html/DS.html\#DSDIV}.}
% As a result, \pkg{ekdosis} will disregard whichever one is not
% selected.
% \vskip\baselineskip
%
% \subsection{\LaTeX\ Standard Divisions}
% \label{sec:latex-divs}
% \pkg{ekdosis} can use the \LaTeX\ standard textual divisions, such
% as \cs{book}, \cs{chapter}, \cs{section} and the like.
%
% \danger However, to have these divisions properly translated into
% \texttt{TEI} numbered |<div>| elements, the |divs| general option
% must be set to |latex| explicitly\---viz. |divs=latex|\---as
% described above \vpageref{ref:divs-opt}.
%
% \danger As the \env{alignment} environment that is provided by
% \pkg{ekdosis} places all aligned texts within \texttt{TEI xml}
% un-numbered |<div>| elements and \LaTeX\ textual divisions are
% converted into numbered |<div|\textsubscript{\emph{n}}|>| elements,
% inserting such divisions in texts to be aligned will result in an
% invalid \texttt{TEI xml} output. Instead, un-numbered divisions
% through \cs{ekddiv} must be used as described below in
% \vref{sec:ekddiv}.
%
% Once |divs| has been set to |latex|, \pkg{ekdosis} converts
% \cs{book}, \cs{part}, \cs{chapter}, \cs{section}, \cs{subsection}
% and \cs{subsubsection} into corresponding \texttt{TEI}
% \enquote*{numbered} |<div|\textsubscript{\emph{n}}|>| elements,
% where $1\leq n\leq 6$.
%
% \paragraph{Adjusting the Levels of Textual Subdivisions}
% \DescribeMacro{\MkBodyDivs}
% \cs{MkBodyDivs}\marg{div1}\marg{div2}\marg{div3}\allowbreak\marg{div4}\marg{div5}\marg{div6}
% takes six mandatory arguments. This command can be used in the
% preamble or at any point of the document to make the number of the
% first-level subdivision of the edition text, viz.\ |<div1>|, match
% to any \LaTeX\ command other than \cs{book}. For example, if
% \cs{section} be the highest-level sectional command used, then
% \cs{MkBodyDivs}|{section}{subsection}{subsubsection}{}{}|\allowbreak|{}|
% will have \cs{section}, \cs{subsection} and \cs{subsubsection}
% converted into |<div1>|, |<div2>| and |<div3>| respectively.
%
% \paragraph{Inserting Variants in Headings}
% Variant readings can be inserted in headings. In this case, the
% optional argument of the \LaTeX\ sectional command must naturally be
% used to prevent variants from going into headers, footers or the
% table of contents, like so:---
% 
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
% Preamble:
\usepackage[teiexport=tidy, divs=latex]{ekdosis}
\MkBodyDivs{chapter}{section}{}{}{}{}

% Document:
\chapter[Ἱπποκράτους ἐπιδημιῶν βιβλίον δεύτερον]{Ἱπποκράτους ἐπιδημιῶν
  \app{
    \lem[wit={I,R,H}]{βιβλίον δεύτερον}
    \rdg[wit=V]{λόγος β’}}}

\section{<Τμῆμα πρῶτον>}
Ἄνθρακες θερινοὶ ἐν Κραννῶνι· [...]
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \texttt{TEI xml} output:---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{xml}
<div1 type="chapter">
  <head>Ἱπποκράτους ἐπιδημιῶν 
  <app>
    <lem wit="#I #R #H">βιβλίον δεύτερον</lem>
    <rdg wit="#V">λόγος β’</rdg>
  </app></head>
  <div2 type="section">
    <head>&lt;Τμῆμα πρῶτον&gt;</head>
    <p>Ἄνθρακες θερινοὶ ἐν Κραννῶνι· [...]</p>
  </div2>
</div1>
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \subsection{Using \texttt{TEI} Un-numbered Divisions}
% \label{sec:ekddiv}
% \danger As already described \vpageref{ref:divs-opt}, the
% un-numbered style of division is the one that is set by default. It
% is congruous to the general option |divs=ekdosis|.
%
% This style provides a flexible mechanism in which format and
% presentation are separated from content. It is designed to meet the
% requirements of classical and literary texts the divisions of which
% may depend on many different received traditions.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\ekddiv} \cs{ekddiv}\marg{key-value arguments} is the
% unique sectional command provided by \pkg{ekdosis}. This command
% converts the divisions into un-numbered \texttt{TEI} |<div>|
% elements allowed to nest recursively and takes one mandatory
% argument in which the following |key-value| arguments are
% accepted:---\\
% \DescribeOption{type} |type|$=$\meta{name}
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: none}\\
% |type| corresponds to the \texttt{TEI} class |att.typed| and can be
% used to classify the element in which it is found in any
% way. Suitable values here can be |book|, |chapter|, |section| and
% the like.\\
% \DescribeOption{n} |n|$=$\meta{value} \hfill
% \tcboxverb{Default: none}\\
% |n| is meant to provide a number or any kind of label for the
% division and does not have to be unique in the document.\\
% \DescribeOption{head} |head|$=$\meta{name}
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: none}\\
% |head| holds the title of the division and may further contain
% variant readings.\\
% \DescribeOption{barehead} |barehead|$=$\meta{name}
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: none}\\
% |barehead| is supposed to be used to prevent unwanted commands from
% going into such places as headers, footers and the table of
% contents.\\
% \DescribeOption{depth} |depth|$=$\meta{n} where $1\leq n\leq 9$
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: 1}\\
% As \texttt{TEI} un-numbered divisions are simply |<div>| elements
% allowed to nest recursively to indicate their hierarchic depth and
% \cs{ekddiv} is an \enquote*{open} \LaTeX\ command, |n| is needed to
% indicate the depth of the division within the hierarchy, the largest
% being |1| and the smallest being |9|.\\
% \DescribeOption{toc}
% |toc|$=$\verb+|book|part|chapter|section|subsection|subsubsection|paragraph+\\
% |subparagraph|\hfill\tcboxverb{Default: not set}\\
% If |toc| be set, the title of the division goes into the table of
% contents at the hierarchic level that is specified as value.
%
% \paragraph{Formatting the Titles}
% \DescribeMacro{\FormatDiv} By design, \pkg{ekdosis} does
% not format the titles. Instead, depending on what is needed for the
% edition text, \cs{FormatDiv}\marg{n}\marg{code
% before}\marg{code after} is provided to lay out the titles of any
% hierarchic depth of division. This command takes three mandatory
% arguments as follows: \meta{n}, which is the number referring to the
% particular depth of division to be formatted and some \LaTeX\
% commands to go before and after the title itself. The following
% example illustrates how the titles of the largest division can be
% printed horizontally centered in a larger size:---
% 
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
\FormatDiv{1}{\begin{center}\Large}{\end{center}}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% To elaborate on the example provided above in \vref{sec:latex-divs},
% here follows how the first three hierarchical levels could be
% formatted as un-numbered divisions:---
% 
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
% Preamble:
\FormatDiv{1}{\begin{center}\Large}{\end{center}}
\FormatDiv{2}{\begin{center}\large}{\end{center}}
\FormatDiv{3}{\bfseries}{.}

% Document:
\begin{ekdosis}
  \ekddiv{
    head={Ἱπποκράτους ἐπιδημιῶν
      \app{
        \lem[wit={I,R,H}]{βιβλίον δεύτερον}
        \rdg[wit=V]{λόγος β’}}},
    type=book,
    depth=1,
    n=II
  }

  \ekddiv{
    head={<Τμῆμα πρῶτον>},
    type=section,
    depth=2,
    n=II.1
  }

  \ekddiv{head=1, type=paragraph, depth=3, n=II.1.1}
  Ἄνθρακες θερινοὶ ἐν Κραννῶνι· [...]
\end{ekdosis}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \needspace{5\baselineskip}
% PDF output:---
% \medskip
% 
% \resetlinenumber
% \FormatDiv{1}{\begin{center}\Large}{\end{center}}
% \FormatDiv{2}{\begin{center}\large}{\end{center}}
% \FormatDiv{3}{\bfseries}{.}
% \begin{alignment}[flush,
%   tcols=1,
%   texts=hippocrates[xml:lang="grc"],
%   apparatus=hippocrates]
%   \AtBeginEnvironment{hippocrates}{\selectlanguage{greek}}
%   \begin{hippocrates}
%       \ekddiv{
%         head={Ἱπποκράτους ἐπιδημιῶν
%           \app{
%           \lem[wit={hI,hR,hH}]{βιβλίον δεύτερον}
%           \rdg[wit=hV]{λόγος β’}}},
%         type=book,
%         depth=1,
%         n=II}
% 
%       \ekddiv{head={<Τμῆμα πρῶτον>}, type=section, depth=2, n=II.1}
% 
%       \ekddiv{head=1, type=paragraph, depth=3, n=II.1.1} Ἄνθρακες
%       θερινοὶ ἐν Κραννῶνι· [...]
%     \end{hippocrates}
% \end{alignment}
%
% \texttt{TEI xml} output:---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{xml}
<div xml:id="div-hippocrates_1" xml:lang="grc">
  <div type="book" n="II">
    <head>Ἱπποκράτους ἐπιδημιῶν 
    <app>
      <lem wit="#I #R #H">βιβλίον δεύτερον</lem>
      <rdg wit="#V">λόγος β’</rdg>
    </app></head>
    <div type="section" n="II.1">
      <head>&lt;Τμῆμα πρῶτον&gt;</head>
      <div type="paragraph" n="II.1.1">
        <head>1</head>
        <p>Ἄνθρακες θερινοὶ ἐν Κραννῶνι· [...]</p>
      </div>
    </div>
  </div>
</div>
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \section{The Tricks of the Trade}
% \label{sec:tricks-of-trade}
% As the |.tex| source file is compiled, \pkg{ekdosis} has to compute
% a tremendous amount of data. Most of this work is performed by
% \textsf{Lua} functions. An edition text narrowed down to a single
% page needs to be compiled at least three times. On the first run,
% the apparatus criticus does not show. Instead, \pkg{ekdosis}
% produces an auxiliary file named \cs{jobname}|.ekd| in which all the
% entries of the apparatus criticus are collected. Then, on the second
% run a test is performed on this auxliary file to determine whether
% there are entries\---and if so, which ones\---to be printed on the
% current page. At the same time, references to the line numbers are
% updated if necessary. Then, on the third run, the apparatus criticus
% is printed.
%
% Of course, every change made to the input may similarly require
% \hologo{LuaLaTeX} to be run three more times to get everything to
% the right place with the right numbers.
%
% In some instances, notably when on a given page entries are very
% abundant in number, specifically when the edition text is getting
% close to the bottom of the page, \pkg{ekdosis} may oscillate
% indefinitely between different sets of page decisions without being
% able to settle down. The condition may be typically illustrated as
% follows: after Lua\LaTeX\ has been run, an entry is attached to the
% last line of the page. As said above, this entry does not show
% yet. But when it does, if it results in an additional line being
% printed in the apparatus criticus, the last line of the edition
% text\---the one the entry was previously attached to\---goes to the
% next page. As a result, this entry also moves to the next page with
% the line it belongs to. This point is literally critical, because
% unless a \cs{pagebreak} is inserted just here so as to keep the
% contentious line on the next page, \pkg{ekdosis} enters a vicious
% circle from which it cannot escape, not to mention that right
% entries with right line numbers cannot come on pages that follow a
% wrong page either.
%
% An alert reader may have guessed that inserting a \cs{pagebreak} is
% a good way to get out of the vicious circle. And surely, if only a
% few pages are at stake, this is the way to go. However,
% \cs{pagebreak} commands should only be inserted when the whole
% edition text is ready for any subtantial change in the preceding
% pages may result in pages that break just after they begin.
%
% Another way\---should the edition text fall into the vicious circle
% too often\---is to limit the number of entries per page that a given
% layer of apparatus criticus may accept as described above
% \vpageref{ref:maxentries}. As a result, \pkg{ekdosis} will take care
% of inserting automatic breakpoints between pages whenever the number
% of entries on a given page reaches the value set as |maxnumber|.
%
% |maxnumber| must not be too small: otherwise offensive to look at
% vertical spaces may come between the edition text and the apparatus
% criticus. Conversely, |maxnumber| must not be too big: otherwise,
% should entries overflow on a given page, the edition text and the
% apparatus criticus may clash. As said above, a couple of clashes can
% be managed with a couple of manually inserted page breaks. But if
% there are too many ot them, it is a good indication that the
% selected value of |maxentries| is too to high.
%
% Complex edition texts do have a magic number. An advisable way to
% figure it out would be to start from a sample of only a few pages,
% selected as evidence for the complexity of the whole. As only a few
% pages would need to be compiled, the magic number should emerge
% quite rapidly.
%
% \section{\texttt{TEI xml} Output}
% \label{sec:teixml-output}
% Several examples of \texttt{TEI xml} output have been provided
% hitherto. Before proceeding, the reader is invited to return to
% every one of them. In this respect, it may be of interest to review
% carefully the excerpt of Caesar's \emph{Gallic War} of which the
% \LaTeX\ source file and its corresponding \texttt{TEI xml} output
% are printed in full below in \vref{sec:caesar-gw-6-1-13}. Once
% \pkg{ekdosis} has been instructed to convert the edition text into
% \texttt{TEI xml} (l.~11), the preamble of this file shows how to set
% languages and fonts to be used in the document (ll.~2--6), format
% the titles (l.~16) and lay out the alignment of an edition text
% associated with two translations (ll.~18--25) in modern
% languages. Furthermore, it shows how information related to each
% language (Latin, English and French) is to be found in two different
% places, namely for \texttt{TEI xml} output (ll.~21--3) and for PDF
% output through \LaTeX\ (ll.~27--9). Finally, it provides examples of
% declaring witnesses, hands, scholars and shorthands (ll.~31--60). As
% to the document itself, it shows how to lay out a conspectus
% siglorum in a table (ll.~64--80), before giving detailed examples of
% how the edition text is entered (ll.~85--101) and sectional commands
% provided by \pkg{ekdosis} are used (ll.~86, 103 and
% 110).\footnote{The PDF output is available as
% \href{samples/Caesar_BG-6-13-1.pdf}{a separate file}.}
%
% \subsection{Requesting \texttt{TEI xml} Output}
% \label{sec:request-tei-output}
% \texttt{TEI xml} output is requested by means of the |teiexport|
% global option as described above
% \vpageref{ref:teiexport-option}. Once instructed to output
% \texttt{TEI}, \pkg{ekdosis} converts and exports in sequence the
% contents of \env{ekdosis} environments (see above
% \vref{sec:single-text-editing}). As regards the contents of
% \env{alignment} environments (see above \vref{sec:alignment-basic}),
% \pkg{ekdosis} first collates the contents of the environments that
% have been declared as values of the |texts| optional argument of
% \env{alignment} or \cs{SetAlignment},\footnote{See above
% \vref{sec:multiple-alignment}.} then places each of the
% corresponding \texttt{TEI xml} outputs within distinct |<div>|
% elements named after the declared environments themselves. For
% example, to return to Caesar's text, the Latin edition text is found
% between a \cs{begin}|{latin}| \dots\ \cs{end}|{latin}| environment
% (see the |.tex| source file, \vref{sec:caesar-gw-tex}, ll.~85--101)
% which is declared at l.~21. Then, the corresponding \texttt{xml}
% output is found within a |<div>| element, the |xml:id| of which has
% been given by \pkg{ekdosis} the value |div-latin_1| (see
% \vref{sec:caesar-gw-tei}, ll.~176--200).
%
% \paragraph{\texttt{TEI} File Name} \DescribeMacro{\SetTEIFilename}
% \cs{SetTEIFilename}\marg{basename} is a preamble-only command. It
% can be used to set the base name of the \texttt{TEI xml} output
% file, to which the suffix |.xml| is appended. By default, the base
% name is \cs{jobname}|-tei|.
%
% \subsection{General Principles}
% \label{sec:totei-general-principles}
% \paragraph{Validation of the \texttt{TEI xml} Structure}
% The reference tool that the author relies on is that provided by the
% \emph{\texttt{TEI} by Example Project}.\footnote{\cite{TBE}.
% The \texttt{TEI} validator is here:
% \url{http://teibyexample.com/xquery/TBEvalidator.xq}.} As for
% \pkg{ekdosis}, it is designed to produce on request, in addition to
% an edition in print, a \texttt{TEI xml} compliant output file. That
% said, one must keep in mind that the \LaTeX\ packages that are part
% of {\TeX}Live can be counted in thousands, and the commands they
% provide in tens of thousands. There may even be grounds in asserting
% that the possibilities offered by \TeX\ and \LaTeX\ quite exceed
% what can be afforded by \texttt{TEI xml}. On another hand, many
% \LaTeX\ commands make no sense in \texttt{TEI}. Therefore, a
% sensible choice is to keep them out of the environments the contents
% of which are to be translated into \texttt{xml} elements, as will be
% illustrated by the following.
% 
% Converting a \LaTeX\ document into \texttt{TEI xml} can be quite an
% intricate business. In many cases, however, \LaTeX\ strings are
% found within environments or groups that are easy to convert into
% \texttt{TEI} equivalents: unless instructed otherwise, whether such
% groups are delimited by opening and closing braces or by explicit
% \cs{begin} \dots\ \cs{end} commands, \pkg{ekdosis} translates them
% into |xml| so that for example \cs{emph}|{word}| and
% \cs{begin}|{quote}| \meta{quoted words} \cs{end}|{quote}| become
% |<emph>| \meta{word} |</emph>| and |<quote>| \meta{quoted words}
% |</quote>| respectively.
%
% But \LaTeX\ does not place everything into groups or
% environments. To take here but a few examples, sectional divisions
% are marked in \LaTeX\ with \enquote{open} commands such as
% \cs{chapter} or \cs{section} with no clear indication where the
% closure of divisions occurs, contrary to \texttt{TEI xml} markup
% with numered or un-numbered |<div>| elements allowed to nest
% recursively. As regards running paragraphs of text, the situation is
% even worse than in the latter case, as the following simple example
% shows:---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}{latex}
\begin{document}
\begin{ekdosis}
  ...

  ... These are the final words of some section in the body text.

  \section{New Section}

  Here is how some new section begins...

  ... Final words.
  \section{Other Section}
  Opening words of the section...
  
  ... Final words
  
  \section{Other Section}
  Opening words...
  
  ... Final words.
\end{ekdosis}
\end{document}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% Obviously, construing this \LaTeX\ source file into \texttt{TEI xml}
% is a fairly complex task. For example, line~6 only closes a
% paragraph for line~7 opens a division (hence |</p><div1>|), line~8
% only opens a paragraph just after the heading of the section (hence
% |</head><p>|) while line~14 both closes the foregoing paragraph and
% opens a new one (hence |</p><p>|), contrary to line~16 which both
% closes a paragraph and a sectional division (hence |</p></div1>|),
% not to mention lines~20--1, where notwithstanding the absence of
% blank line or any other indication,
% |</p></div1></body></text></TEI>| is needed.
%
% \pkg{ekdosis} has been designed to implement this task through
% \textsf{Lua} functions which involve string matching (both forward
% and reverse matching) and recursions.
%
% \paragraph{The \texttt{xml:id} Attribute}
% As a general rule, the |xml:id| global attribute must be unique for
% the element that bears the attribute. Furthermore, it must begin
% with a letter or an underscore and contain no characters other that
% letters, digits, hyphens underscores and full stops. \pkg{ekdosis}
% issues a warning when it finds that any \meta{unique id} of
% \meta{unique label} expected in the first argument of
% \cs{DeclareWitness}, \cs{DeclareHand} or \cs{DeclareScholar} is not
% unique or breaks the rules just described, but does not prevent the
% |.tex| source file from compiling. Instead, it prints the string
% |<??>| in place of the expected formatted siglum so that the error
% in the |.tex| source file can be easily spotted and corrected.
%
% \danger As the \meta{unique id} declared with \cs{DeclareShorthand}
% is not to be exported in the \texttt{TEI xml} outputfile,
% \pkg{ekdosis} checks neither its uniqueness nor its validness.
%
% \danger It must be noted that \LaTeX\ labels that are provided in
% commands such as \cs{label}, \cs{cite} and the like must also be
% unique in the document. As \LaTeX\ will issue warnings if it finds
% duplicates, \cs{ekdosis} does not check their uniqueness but will
% issue warnings if such labels contain invalid strings.
%
% \paragraph{\texttt{TEI xml} Export Settings}
% \label{ref:setteixmlexport}
% \DescribeMacro{\SetTEIxmlExport} \cs{SetTEIxmlExport}\marg{csv list
% of options} can be used in the preamble or at any point of the
% document, except inside environments set to receive an apparatus
% criticus, namely the \env{ekdosis} environment or any other similar
% environment declared by means of \cs{DeclareApparatus}.\footnote{See
% above \vref{sec:declaring-layers}.} At the time of writing, there is
% only one option, as follows:---\\
% \DescribeOption{autopar} |autopar|$=$\verb+true|false+
% \hfill\tcboxverb{Default: true}\\
% The algorithm described above applies for edition texts composed in
% running paragraphs or in lines of poetry, but it may fail to produce
% a valid \texttt{TEI xml} output with other arrangements, such as
% performance texts or transcriptions of speech for which the
% \texttt{TEI} Guidelines define specific rules.  |autopar=false|
% instructs \pkg{ekdosis} to ignore blank lines in the |.tex| source
% file as markers for paragraph boundaries. As a result, each
% paragraph of the edition text must be found within an environment
% associated with the \texttt{xml} |<p>| element, such as \env{ekdpar}
% or any other environment declared as such by means of \cs{EnvtoTEI}
% described below in \vref{sec:new-cmds-envs}. A typical use case of
% |autopar=false| is provided below in
% \vref{sec:specific-tei-modules}.
%
% \DescribeEnv{ekdpar} \cs{begin}|{ekdpar}| \dots\ \cs{end}|{ekdpar}|
% is a simple environment that does nothing but insert \cs{par}
% primitives. It can be used to instruct \pkg{ekdosis} to place
% paragraphs within |<p>| elements when |autopar| has been set to
% |false| by means of \cs{SetTEIxmlExport} described above.
%
% \subsection{Routine \LaTeX\ Commands and Environments}
% \label{sec:routine-cmds}
% The list of \LaTeX\ commands known by \pkg{ekdosis} at the time of
% writing follows. To this list must be added the \LaTeX\ standard
% commands that are used for sectional divisions as described above in
% \vref{sec:latex-divs} and most of the commands provided by the
% \pkg{arabluatex} and \pkg{icite}\footcite{icite} packages. Standard
% citation commands are also supported as will be described below in
% \vref{sec:citation-cmds}:---
% 
% \begin{xltabular}{0.825\linewidth}{XX}
%     \toprule
%     \LaTeX\ command & \texttt{TEI xml} element\\
%     \midrule\endhead
%     \cs{textsuperscript}|{}| & |<hi rend="sup"></hi>| \\
%     \cs{textsubscript}|{}| & |<hi rend="sub"></hi>| \\
%     \cs{textbf}|{}| & |<hi rend="bold"></hi>| \\
%     \cs{textit}|{}| & |<hi rend="italic"></hi>| \\
%     \cs{textsc}|{}| & |<hi rend="smallcaps"></hi>| \\
%     \cs{textsf}|{}| & |<hi rend="sf"></hi>| \\
%     \cs{footnote}|{}| & |<note place="bottom"></note>| \\
%     \cs{enquote}\meta{*}|{}| & |<quote></quote>| \\
%     \cs{label}|{label}| & |<anchor xml:id="label"/>| \\
%     \cs{linelabel}|{label}| & |<anchor xml:id="label"/>| \\
%     \cs{ref}|{label}| & |<ptr ="#label"/>| \\
%     \cs{pageref}|{label}| & |<ptr ="#label"/>| \\
%     \cs{vref}|{label}| & |<ptr ="#label"/>| \\
%     \cs{vpageref}|{label}| & |<ptr ="#label"/>| \\
%     \cs{pagebreak}\meta{\oarg{1-4}} & no output \\
%     \cs{mbox}|{}| & no output \\
%     \bottomrule
% \end{xltabular}
%
% As for environments:---
% 
% \begin{xltabular}{0.825\linewidth}{XX}
%     \toprule
%     \LaTeX\ environment & \texttt{TEI xml} element\\
%     \midrule\endhead
%     |flushright| & |<p rend="align(right)"></p>| \\
%     |flushleft| & |<p rend="align(left)"></p>| \\
%     |center| & |<p rend="align(center)"></p>| \\
%     |quotation| & |<quote></quote>| \\
%     |quoting| & |<quote></quote>| \\
%     |ekdpar| & |<p></p>| \\
%     |ekdverse| & |<lg></lg>| \\
%     |verse| & |<lg></lg>| \\
%     \bottomrule
% \end{xltabular}
%
% Regarding other, very frequently used commands or environments, some
% do not need to be inserted in the translation tables: as already
% said above, \pkg{ekdosis} converts by default the original names of
% these into \texttt{xml} elements. For instance, \cs{emph}|{}| and
% \cs{begin}|{quote}| \dots\ \cs{end}|{quote}| will result in
% |<emph></emph>| and |<quote></quote>| respectively.
%
% For the same simple reason, if one wishes to have words within a
% \texttt{TEI xml} element that does not have any \LaTeX\ equivalent,
% all is needed is to define an inoperative \LaTeX\ command named
% after the \texttt{TEI} element, like so:---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
% Preamble:
\newcommand{\mentioned}[1]{#1}

% Document:

Our usage corresponds to the \mentioned{aggregate} of many
mathematical writings and to the sense of \mentioned{class} found in
older logical writings.
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \texttt{TEI xml} output:---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{xml}
<p>Our usage corresponds to the <mentioned>aggregate</mentioned> of
many mathematical writings and to the sense of
<mentioned>class</mentioned> found in older logical writings.</p>
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% Of course, it is also possible to have the \enquote{mentioned} words
% printed in a different font family:---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
\newcommand{\mentioned}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% This command will print them in a sans serif font family, with the
% exact same \texttt{TEI xml} output as above.
%
% \subsection{Processing New Commands or Environments}
% \label{sec:new-cmds-envs}
% The following three commands are provided to instruct \pkg{ekdosis}
% how to convert unknown or unusual \hologo{(La)TeX} commands or
% environments into \texttt{TEI xml} equivalents.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\TeXtoTEI} \cs{TeXtoTEI}\marg{csname}\marg{TEI
% element}\oarg{TEI attribute(s)}\\
% \cs{TeXtoTEI} takes two mandatory arguments and one optional
% argument, namely: the control sequence name to be converted, the
% \texttt{TEI} element it is to be converted into and any additional
% \texttt{xml} attributes to be appended to the opening \texttt{TEI}
% element. For example, the \cs{sidenote} command that is provided by
% the \cs{sidenotes} package can be processed like so:---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
% Preamble:
\TeXtoTEI{sidenote}{note}[place="margin"]

% Document:
\begin{ekdosis}
  \begin{ekdverse}
    The self-same moment I could pray;\sidenote{The spell begins to
      break}\footnote{The turning point of the poem...}
  \end{ekdverse}
\end{ekdosis}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \texttt{TEI xml} output:---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{xml}
<lg>
  <l>The self-same moment I could pray;
  <note place="margin">The spell begins to break</note>
  <note place="bottom">The turning point of the
  poem...</note></l>
</lg>
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% Even more subtly, provided that the code |#STC| points to some more
% information identifying the agency concerned:\footnote{At the time
% of writing, \enquote*{scholars} can be declared with
% \cs{DeclareScholar} as described above
% \vpageref{ref:declare-scholar}. Then the unique ID used in the first
% argument of this command can point to the list of references
% inserted by \pkg{ekdosis} in the back matter section of the
% \texttt{TEI} ouput file. See below \vref{sec:references-cited-works}
% for more information on how to do this.}---
% 
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
% Preamble:
\usepackage{sidenotes}
\usepackage[teiexport=tidy]{ekdosis}

\TeXtoTEI{sidenote}{note}[place="margin"]

\newcommand{\STCsnote}[1]{\sidenote{#1}}
\TeXtoTEI{STCsnote}{note}[place="margin" resp="#STC"]

% Document:
\begin{ekdosis}
  \begin{ekdverse}
    The self-same moment I could pray;\STCsnote{The spell begins to
      break}\footnote{The turning point of the poem...}
  \end{ekdverse}
\end{ekdosis}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \texttt{TEI xml} output:---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{xml}
<lg>
  <l>The self-same moment I could pray;
  <note place="margin" resp="#STC">The spell begins to
  break</note>
  <note place="bottom">The turning point of the
  poem...</note></l>
</lg>
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \DescribeMacro{\EnvtoTEI} \DescribeMacro{\EnvtoTEI*}
% \cs{EnvtoTEI}\meta{*}\marg{env name}\marg{TEI element}\oarg{TEI
% attribute(s)}\\
% \cs{EnvtoTEI} instructs \pkg{ekdosis} how to convert \LaTeX\
% environments into \texttt{TEI xml} equivalents. It takes two
% mandatory arguments and one optional argument, namely the name of
% the \LaTeX\ environment to be converted, the \texttt{TEI} element it
% is to be converted into and any additional attributes to be appended
% to the \texttt{TEI} opening element. \cs{EnvtoTEI*} is restricted to
% \texttt{TEI} elements that must never appear within |<p>| elements,
% such as |<p>| itself, |<div>|, |<lg>| and the like. The following
% example illustrates how \cs{EnvtoTEI} can be used conjointly with
% \pkg{babel} to convey information about the languages used from
% \LaTeX\ to \texttt{TEI}:---
% 
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
% Preamble:
% Use babel and babeltags:
\usepackage[greek.ancient, english]{babel}
\babeltags{ancientgreek = greek}

\EnvtoTEI{ancientgreek}{p}[xml:lang="grc"]

% Document:
\begin{ekdosis}
  \begin{ancientgreek}
    περὶ πολλοῦ ἂν ποιησαίμην, ὦ ἄνδρες, τὸ τοιούτους ὑμᾶς ἐμοὶ
    δικαστὰς περὶ τούτου τοῦ πράγματος γενέσθαι, οἷοίπερ ἂν ὑμῖν
    αὐτοῖς εἴητε τοιαῦτα πεπονθότες...
  \end{ancientgreek}
\end{ekdosis}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \texttt{TEI xml} output:---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{xml}
<p xml:lang="grc">περὶ πολλοῦ ἂν ποιησαίμην, ὦ ἄνδρες, τὸ
τοιούτους ὑμᾶς ἐμοὶ δικαστὰς περὶ τούτου τοῦ πράγματος
γενέσθαι, οἷοίπερ ἂν ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς εἴητε τοιαῦτα πεπονθότες...</p>
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \DescribeMacro{\TeXtoTEIPatt}
% \cs{TeXtoTEIPatt}\marg{\TeX\ pattern}\marg{TEI pattern}\\
% Finally, this more flexible\---and more delicate to
% handle\---command uses pattern matching to instruct \pkg{ekdosis}
% how to convert \hologo{(La)TeX} commands into \texttt{TEI}
% equivalents. In the first mandatory argument, strings to be captured
% are marked in sequence with numbers prefixed by |#|, like so: |#1|,
% |#2|, |#3| and so forth. Then, in the second mandatory argument, the
% strings captured are inserted where each of them is expected in
% the \texttt{TEI} element.
%
% \danger Strings must be entered exactly as \pkg{ekdosis} will find
% them as the |.tex| source file is compiled. Specifically,
% \emph{control sequences}, namely the coded commands immediately
% preceded by `\verb+\+' are always found followed by a space. For
% instance, |\emph{}| will be seen and processed by \pkg{ekdosis} as
% \verb*|\emph {}|.
%
% The following example illustrates how \pkg{ekdosis} can be
% instructed to process the
% \cs{textcolor}\allowbreak\marg{color}\marg{text} command:---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
\TeXtoTEIPatt{\textcolor {#1}{#2}}{<hi rend="#1">#2</hi>}

Sample text with a \textcolor{red}{word} in red.
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{xml}
<p>Sample text with a 
<hi rend="red">word</hi>in red.</p>
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \subsection{Specific \texttt{TEI} Modules}
% \label{sec:specific-tei-modules}
% The following example illustrates how \pkg{ekdosis} can be adapted
% in a straightforward way to modules provided by the \texttt{TEI} for
% encoding specific texts such as transcriptions of
% speech.\footnote{See
% \url{https://tei-c.org/release/doc/tei-p5-doc/en/html/TS.html}.} The
% technique applied below uses \cs{EnvtoTEI} conjointly with
% \cs{SetTEIxmlExport}|{autopar=|\allowbreak|false}| described above
% \vpageref{ref:setteixmlexport}:---
% 
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}{latex}
% Preamble:
\newenvironment{speech}{\par}{\par}
\newcommand{\speaker}[1]{\textbf{#1}\par}
\EnvtoTEI{speech}{sp}

\SetTEIxmlExport{autopar=false}

% Document:
\begin{ekdosis}
  \begin{speech}
    \speaker{Σωκράτης}
    \begin{ekdpar}
      κατέβην χθὲς εἰς Πειραιᾶ μετὰ Γλαύκωνος τοῦ Ἀρίστωνος
      προσευξόμενός τε τῇ θεῷ καὶ ἅμα τὴν ἑορτὴν βουλόμενος θεάσασθαι
      τίνα τρόπον ποιήσουσιν ἅτε νῦν πρῶτον ἄγοντες. καλὴ μὲν οὖν μοι
      καὶ ἡ τῶν ἐπιχωρίων πομπὴ ἔδοξεν εἶναι, οὐ μέντοι ἧττον ἐφαίνετο
      πρέπειν ἣν οἱ Θρᾷκες ἔπεμπον.
    \end{ekdpar}
  \end{speech}
\end{ekdosis}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \begin{remarks}
% \item Lines~2--3 define a basic environment meant to contain
% indivivual speeches and a command to hold the name of the
% speaker. This name is printed in bold face and followed by a new
% paragraph in the PDF output.
% \item Line~4 instructs \pkg{ekdosis} to convert \env{speech} \LaTeX\
%   environments into |<sp>| \texttt{TEI xml} elements.
% \item Line~6 disables the |autopar| algorithm that \cs{ekdosis}
%   provides by default for running paragraphs of text. As a
%   consequence, \env{ekdpar} is used to mark the paragraphs.
% \end{remarks}
% 
% PDF output:---
% \medskip
%
% \SetTEIxmlExport{autopar=false}
% \begingroup
% \newenvironment{speech}{\par\selectlanguage{greek}}{\par}
% \newcommand{\speaker}[1]{\textbf{#1}\par}
% \EnvtoTEI{speech}{sp}
% \resetlinenumber
% \begin{alignment}[flush,tcols=1,texts=specimen,apparatus=specimen]
%   \begin{specimen}
%  \begin{speech}
%    \speaker{Σωκράτης}
%    \begin{ekdpar}
%      κατέβην χθὲς εἰς Πειραιᾶ μετὰ Γλαύκωνος τοῦ Ἀρίστωνος
%      προσευξόμενός τε τῇ θεῷ καὶ ἅμα τὴν ἑορτὴν βουλόμενος θεάσασθαι
%      τίνα τρόπον ποιήσουσιν ἅτε νῦν πρῶτον ἄγοντες. καλὴ μὲν οὖν μοι
%      καὶ ἡ τῶν ἐπιχωρίων πομπὴ ἔδοξεν εἶναι, οὐ μέντοι ἧττον ἐφαίνετο
%      πρέπειν ἣν οἱ Θρᾷκες ἔπεμπον.
%    \end{ekdpar}
%  \end{speech}     
%   \end{specimen}
% \end{alignment}
% \endgroup
% \SetTEIxmlExport{autopar=true}
%
% \texttt{TEI xml} output:---
% 
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{xml}
<sp>
  <speaker>Σωκράτης</speaker>
  <p>κατέβην χθὲς εἰς Πειραιᾶ μετὰ Γλαύκωνος τοῦ Ἀρίστωνος
  προσευξόμενός τε τῇ θεῷ καὶ ἅμα τὴν ἑορτὴν βουλόμενος
  θεάσασθαι τίνα τρόπον ποιήσουσιν ἅτε νῦν πρῶτον ἄγοντες.
  καλὴ μὲν οὖν μοι καὶ ἡ τῶν ἐπιχωρίων πομπὴ ἔδοξεν εἶναι, οὐ
  μέντοι ἧττον ἐφαίνετο πρέπειν ἣν οἱ Θρᾷκες ἔπεμπον.</p>
</sp>
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \subsection{References to Cited Works}
% \label{sec:references-cited-works}
% A full example of what is technically called a \emph{Conspectus
% Siglorum} can be found above in \vref{sec:print-witnesses}. Such a
% list of manuscript sigla should be found immediately before the
% edition text. Traditionally, this section is followed by a list of
% other sources used to establish the text, so that the edited text is
% in the end established both from manuscript evidence (the
% \enquote{witnesses}) and other works based on a scholarly approach
% of the text (the \enquote{sources}) which are called in Latin
% \emph{Editiones uel Studia}. As a consequence of this classification
% as \enquote{witness} or \enquote{source}, the former must go within
% the |<listWit>| element of the \texttt{TEI} header, whereas the
% latter is to be found within the |<listBibl>| element.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\SetxmlBibResource}
% \cs{SetxmlBibResource}\marg{basename} is a preamble-only command. If
% a base name for a \texttt{TEI xml} compliant bibliographical
% database be provided, \pkg{ekdosis} will use it and insert formatted
% data in the back matter section of its own \texttt{TEI xml} output
% file, as |<biblStruct>| elements within a |listBibl| section.
%
% As an example, the following Bib\hologo{(La)TeX} entry and its
% \texttt{TEI} equivalent follow:\footnote{\label{fn:zotero}To the
% author's knowledge, \textsf{Zotero} (\url{https://www.zotero.org})
% provides excellent \texttt{TEI xml} output from Bib\hologo{(La)TeX}
% input files.}---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}{bibtex}
@Book{Drak,
  title = {Punicorum Libri Septemdecim},
  author = {Silius Italicus, Tiberius Catius},
  editor = {Drakenborch, Arnold},
  date = {1717},
  publisher = {Trajecti ad Rhenum},
  location = {Utrecht}
}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}{xml}
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<listBibl xmlns="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0">
  <biblStruct type="book" xml:id="Drak">
    <monogr>
      <title level="m">Punicorum libri septemdecim</title>
      <author>
        <forename>Tiberius Catius</forename>
        <surname>Silius Italicus</surname>
      </author>
      <editor>
        <forename>Arnold</forename>
        <surname>Drakenborch</surname>
      </editor>
      <imprint>
        <pubPlace>Utrecht</pubPlace>
        <publisher>Trajecti ad Rhenum</publisher>
        <date>1717</date>
      </imprint>
    </monogr>
  </biblStruct>
</listBibl>
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \danger As can be seen, the same string |Drak| is used as a label in
% the Bib\hologo{(La)TeX} file (l.~1) and an |xml:id| in the
% \texttt{TEI} file (l.~3). This same label must be used again in the
% preamble of the |.tex| source file to declare Arnold Drakenborch as a
% scholar,\footnote{See above \vpageref{ref:declare-scholar}.} like
% so:---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}{latex}
% Use 'bibl.xml' as a TEI xml bibliographical database:
\SetxmlBibResource{bibl} % 'bibl' is the basename of 'bibl.xml'

% Declare A. Drakenborch as scholar:
\DeclareScholar{Drak}{\emph{Drakenborch}}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \label{ref:ekdverse-ex}
% Finally, an extract of Silius Italicus' \emph{Punica}, Book~9,
% ll.~30-2 follows (|.tex| source file, PDF output and \texttt{TEI}
% output files):---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}{latex}
% Preamble:
\usepackage[teiexport=tidy]{ekdosis}

% Witnesses:
\DeclareWitness{L}{L}{Laurentianus, plut, XXXVII, cod. 16}[
                      origDate=s. XV]
% Other witnesses [...]

% Scholars:
\DeclareScholar{Drak}{\emph{Drakenborch}}
% Other scholars [...]

% basename of the .xml bibliographical database:
\SetxmlBibResource{bibl}

% Document:
\begin{ekdosis}
  \begin{ekdverse}
    Sed uos, quorum oculos atque ora humentia uidi,\\
    uertere cum consul terga et remeare iuberet,\\
    \app{
      \lem[wit=Drak]{ne morem}
      \rdg[wit={L, F}]{me morem}
      \rdg[wit={O, V}]{memorem}
    } et pugnae signum exspectate petendae:
  \end{ekdverse}
\end{ekdosis}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \needspace{7\baselineskip}
% PDF output:---
% \medskip
%
% \begin{alignment}[flush,tcols=1,texts=specimen,apparatus=specimen]
% \resetlinenumber[30]\rightlinenumbers
% \setlength{\linenumbersep}{-1.5in}
%   \begin{specimen}
%     \begin{ekdverse}
%       Sed uos, quorum oculos atque ora humentia uidi,\\
%       uertere cum consul terga et remeare iuberet,\\
%       \app{
%         \lem[wit=sDrak]{ne morem}
%         \rdg[wit={sL, sF}]{me morem}
%         \rdg[wit={sO, sV}]{memorem}
%       } et pugnae signum exspectate petendae:
%     \end{ekdverse}
%   \end{specimen}
% \end{alignment}
%
% \texttt{TEI xml} output file produced by \pkg{ekdosis} (narrowed
% down to the |<text>| element):---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}{xml}
<text>
  <body>
    <lg>
      <l>Sed uos, quorum oculos atque ora humentia uidi,</l>
      <l>uertere cum consul terga et remeare iuberet,</l>
      <l>
      <app>
        <lem wit="#Drak">ne morem</lem>
        <rdg wit="#L #F">me morem</rdg>
        <rdg wit="#O #V">memorem</rdg>
      </app>et pugnae signum exspectate petendae:</l>
    </lg>
  </body>
  <back>
    <listBibl>
      <biblStruct type="book" xml:id="Drak">
        <monogr>
          <title level="m">Punicorum libri septemdecim</title>
          <author>
            <forename>Tiberius Catius</forename>
            <surname>Silius Italicus</surname>
          </author>
          <editor>
            <forename>Arnold</forename>
            <surname>Drakenborch</surname>
          </editor>
          <imprint>
            <pubPlace>Utrecht</pubPlace>
            <publisher>Trajecti ad Rhenum</publisher>
            <date>1717</date>
          </imprint>
        </monogr>
      </biblStruct>
    </listBibl>
  </back>
</text>
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \subsection{Citation Commands}
% \label{sec:citation-cmds}
% \pkg{ekdosis} can also convert into \texttt{TEI xml} references to
% cited works. Depending on the optional arguments used in the
% citation command, references will be converted into |<ptr>| or
% |<ref>| elements with the appropriate ID supplied by means of the
% |target| attribute.
%
% Of course, for this mechanism to work, Bib\TeX\ or Bib\LaTeX\ must
% be used and connected to some |.bib| bibliographical database
% file. Additionally, this |.bib| file must have been converted into a
% \texttt{TEI xml} compliant file where all the Bib\hologo{(La)TeX}
% entries that are used in the document are found within
% |<biblStruct>| elements.\footnote{See above n.~\vref{fn:zotero} for
% information on how to do this.} Finally, this |.xml| bibliographical
% database must have been connected to the |.tex| source file by means
% of \cs{SetxmlBibResource} described above in
% \vref{sec:references-cited-works}.
%
% As an example, the following |sample.bib| file is used:---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{bibtex}
@Book{ReynoldsWilson1991,
  author =	 {Reynolds, L. D. and Wilson, N. G},
  title =	 {Scribes and Scholars},
  year =	 {1991},
  subtitle =	 {A Guide to the Translation of Greek and Latin
                  Literature},
  edition =	 {3},
  publisher =	 {Clarendon Press},
  location =	 {Oxford}
}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% It has been converted into |sample.xml| as follows:---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{xml}
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<listBibl xmlns="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0">
  <biblStruct type="book" xml:id="ReynoldsWilson1991">
    <monogr>
      <title level="m">Scribes and Scholars</title>
      <author>
        <forename>L. D.</forename>
        <surname>Reynolds</surname>
      </author>
      <author>
        <forename>N. G.</forename>
        <surname>Wilson</surname>
      </author>
      <edition>3</edition>
      <imprint>
        <pubPlace>Oxford</pubPlace>
        <publisher>Clarendon Press</publisher>
        <date>1991</date>
      </imprint>
    </monogr>
  </biblStruct>
</listBibl>
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% Once both files have been prepared, inserting references and
% exporting them into the \texttt{TEI xml} ouput file can be achieved
% in a straightforward way. (The full |sample.tex| is provided
% below.)---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
\documentclass{article}

\usepackage[teiexport=tidy]{ekdosis}
\SetxmlBibResource{sample} % base name supplied here, without the
                           % extension

\usepackage[style=oxnotes]{biblatex}
\addbibresource{sample.bib}

\begin{document}
\begin{ekdosis}
  On textual criticism, see \cite[207--241]{ReynoldsWilson1991}.
\end{ekdosis}
\end{document}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% PDF output:---
% \medskip
%
% \resetlinenumber
% \begin{alignment}[flush,tcols=1,texts=specimen,apparatus=specimen]
%   \begin{specimen}
%   On textual criticism, see \cite[207--241]{ReynoldsWilson1991}.
%   \end{specimen}
% \end{alignment}
%
% \medskip
% \texttt{TEI xml} ouput narrowed down to the contents of the |<text>|
% element:---
%
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{xml}
<text>
  <body>
    <p>On textual criticism, see 
    <ref target="#ReynoldsWilson1991">207--241</ref>.</p>
  </body>
  <back>
    <listBibl>
      <biblStruct type="book" xml:id="ReynoldsWilson1991">
        <monogr>
          <title level="m">Scribes and Scholars</title>
          <author>
            <forename>L. D.</forename>
            <surname>Reynolds</surname>
          </author>
          <author>
            <forename>N. G.</forename>
            <surname>Wilson</surname>
          </author>
          <edition>3</edition>
          <imprint>
            <pubPlace>Oxford</pubPlace>
            <publisher>Clarendon Press</publisher>
            <date>1991</date>
          </imprint>
        </monogr>
      </biblStruct>
    </listBibl>
  </back>
</text>
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% At the time of writing, the following citation commands are
% converted into \texttt{TEI xml} by \pkg{ekdosis}:---
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item
% \cs{icite}\oarg{prenote}\oarg{postnote}\marg{key}\footnote{From the
% \pkg{icite} package. \cs{icite} can be used in place of almost any
% standard citation command. See \cite{icite}.}
% \item \cs{cite}\oarg{prenote}\oarg{postnote}\marg{key}
% \item \cs{Cite}\oarg{prenote}\oarg{postnote}\marg{key}
% \item \cs{cite*}\oarg{prenote}\oarg{postnote}\marg{key}
% \item \cs{parencite}\oarg{prenote}\oarg{postnote}\marg{key}
% \item \cs{Parencite}\oarg{prenote}\oarg{postnote}\marg{key}
% \item \cs{parencite*}\oarg{prenote}\oarg{postnote}\marg{key}
% \item \cs{footcite}\oarg{prenote}\oarg{postnote}\marg{key}
% \item \cs{footcitetext}\oarg{prenote}\oarg{postnote}\marg{key}
% \item \cs{textcite}\oarg{prenote}\oarg{postnote}\marg{key}
% \item \cs{Textcite}\oarg{prenote}\oarg{postnote}\marg{key}
% \item \cs{smartcite}\oarg{prenote}\oarg{postnote}\marg{key}
% \item \cs{Smartcite}\oarg{prenote}\oarg{postnote}\marg{key}
% \item \cs{autocite}\oarg{prenote}\oarg{postnote}\marg{key}
% \item \cs{Autocite}\oarg{prenote}\oarg{postnote}\marg{key}
% \item \cs{autocite*}\oarg{prenote}\oarg{postnote}\marg{key}
% \item \cs{Autocite*}\oarg{prenote}\oarg{postnote}\marg{key}
% \end{enumerate}
%
% The next release of \pkg{ekdosis} will include all citation commands
% with the exception of so-called \enquote{qualified citation lists}.
% 
% \section{Future Work}
% \label{sec:future-work}
% A short, uncommented list of what is planned in the versions of
% \pkg{ekdosis} to come follows:---
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item Very short-term (weeks):---
%   \begin{enumerate}
%   \item Editorial changes, for inserting corrections and
%   conjectures.
%   \item Text structure: milestone elements.
%   \end{enumerate}
% \item Short-term (months):---
%   \begin{enumerate}
%   \item Poetry: The standard \env{verse} environment is supported by
%     the current version of \pkg{ekdosis}, in addition to
%     \env{ekdverse} an example of which has been provided above
%     \vpageref{ref:ekdverse-ex}. \env{ekdverse} will provide refined
%     options, such as metrical analysis, stanzaic forms, \emph{\&c.}
%     Arabic poetry through the environments and commands provided by
%     the \pkg{arabluatex} package will also be supported.
%   \item Correspondence and alignment, segmentation: The functions
%     are being tested at the time of writing and will be included
%     shortly in \pkg{ekdosis}.
%   \end{enumerate}
% \item Medium-term: Indexing, commands and environments for specific
%   modules of the \texttt{TEI}.
% \end{enumerate}
% 
% \begin{comment}
%   \section{Correspondence and Alignment}
% \end{comment}
% \label{sec:correspondence-alignment}
%
% \label{ref:segmentation}
% 
% \section{GNU Free Documentation License}
% \label{sec:fdl}
% \textbf{Version 1.3, 3 November 2008}
% 
% \begin{center}
%   Version 1.3, 3 November 2008
%   
%   Copyright \copyright{} 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free
%   Software Foundation, Inc.
%   
%   \bigskip
%   
%   \url{https://fsf.org/}
%   
%   \bigskip
%   
%   Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
%   of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
% \end{center}
% 
% \needspace{3\baselineskip}
% \begin{center}
%   {\bf\large Preamble}
% \end{center}
% 
% The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
% functional and useful document \enquote{free} in the sense of
% freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and
% redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially
% or noncommercially.  Secondarily, this License preserves for the
% author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not
% being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
% 
% This License is a kind of \enquote{copyleft}, which means that
% derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same
% sense.  It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a
% copyleft license designed for free software.
% 
% We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
% free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
% free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
% that the software does.  But this License is not limited to software
% manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject
% matter or whether it is published as a printed book.  We recommend
% this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or
% reference.
% 
% \needspace{3\baselineskip}
% \begin{center}
%   {\large\bf 1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS\par}
% \end{center}
% 
% This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium,
% that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can
% be distributed under the terms of this License.  Such a notice
% grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to
% use that work under the conditions stated herein.  The
% \enquote{\textbf{Document}}, below, refers to any such manual or
% work.  Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as
% \enquote{\textbf{you}}.  You accept the license if you copy, modify
% or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright
% law.
% 
% A \enquote{\textbf{Modified Version}} of the Document means any work
% containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim,
% or with modifications and/or translated into another language.
% 
% A \enquote{\textbf{Secondary Section}} is a named appendix or a
% front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the
% relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the
% Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains
% nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject.
% (Thus, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a
% Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.)  The
% relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the
% subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial,
% philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.
% 
% The \enquote{\textbf{Invariant Sections}} are certain Secondary
% Sections whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant
% Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released
% under this License.  If a section does not fit the above definition
% of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant.
% The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections.  If the Document
% does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none.
% 
% The \enquote{\textbf{Cover Texts}} are certain short passages of
% text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in
% the notice that says that the Document is released under this
% License.  A Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a
% Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
% 
% A \enquote{\textbf{Transparent}} copy of the Document means a
% machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification
% is available to the general public, that is suitable for revising
% the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for
% images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings)
% some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input
% to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of
% formats suitable for input to text formatters.  A copy made in an
% otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of
% markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent
% modification by readers is not Transparent.  An image format is not
% Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text.  A copy that
% is not \enquote{Transparent} is called \enquote{\textbf{Opaque}}.
% 
% Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
% ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML
% or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming
% simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification.
% Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG.
% Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and
% edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which
% the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the
% machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word
% processors for output purposes only.
% 
% The \enquote{\textbf{Title Page}} means, for a printed book, the
% title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold,
% legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title
% page.  For works in formats which do not have any title page as
% such, \enquote{Title Page} means the text near the most prominent
% appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body
% of the text.
% 
% The \enquote{\textbf{publisher}} means any person or entity that
% distributes copies of the Document to the public.
% 
% A section \enquote{\textbf{Entitled XYZ}} means a named subunit of
% the Document whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in
% parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language.
% (Here XYZ stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such
% as \enquote{\textbf{Acknowledgements}},
% \enquote{\textbf{Dedications}}, \enquote{\textbf{Endorsements}}, or
% \enquote{\textbf{History}}.)  To \enquote{\textbf{Preserve the
% Title}} of such a section when you modify the Document means that it
% remains a section \enquote{Entitled XYZ} according to this
% definition.
% 
% The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice
% which states that this License applies to the Document.  These
% Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in
% this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
% implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has
% no effect on the meaning of this License.
% 
% \needspace{3\baselineskip}
% \begin{center}
%   {\large\bf 2. VERBATIM COPYING\par}
% \end{center}
% 
% You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
% commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
% copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
% applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
% add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You
% may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or
% further copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However, you
% may accept compensation in exchange for copies.  If you distribute a
% large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in
% section~3.
% 
% You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
% and you may publicly display copies.
% 
% \needspace{3\baselineskip}
% \begin{center}
%   {\large\bf 3. COPYING IN QUANTITY\par}
% \end{center}
% 
% If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have
% printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the
% Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the
% copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover
% Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on
% the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify
% you as the publisher of these copies.  The front cover must present
% the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and
% visible.  You may add other material on the covers in addition.
% Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve
% the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be
% treated as verbatim copying in other respects.
% 
% If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
% legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
% reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent
% pages.
% 
% If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering
% more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable
% Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with
% each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general
% network-using public has access to download using public-standard
% network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free
% of added material.  If you use the latter option, you must take
% reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque
% copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain
% thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after
% the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through
% your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.
% 
% It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
% the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies,
% to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the
% Document.
% 
% \needspace{3\baselineskip}
% \begin{center}
%   {\large\bf 4. MODIFICATIONS\par}
% \end{center}
% 
% You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under
% the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release
% the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified
% Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing
% distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever
% possesses a copy of it.  In addition, you must do these things in
% the Modified Version:
% 
% \begin{itemize}
% \item[A.]  Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
%   distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous
%   versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the
%   History section of the Document).  You may use the same title as a
%   previous version if the original publisher of that version gives
%   permission.
%    
%  \item[B.]  List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons
%    or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in
%    the Modified Version, together with at least five of the
%    principal authors of the Document (all of its principal authors,
%    if it has fewer than five), unless they release you from this
%    requirement.
%    
%  \item[C.]  State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
%    Modified Version, as the publisher.
%    
%  \item[D.]  Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
%    
%  \item[E.]  Add an appropriate copyright notice for your
%    modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices.
%    
%  \item[F.]  Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a
%    license notice giving the public permission to use the Modified
%    Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the
%    Addendum below.
%    
%  \item[G.]  Preserve in that license notice the full lists of
%    Invariant Sections and required Cover Texts given in the
%    Document's license notice.
%    
%  \item[H.]  Include an unaltered copy of this License.
%    
%  \item[I.]  Preserve the section Entitled \enquote{History},
%    Preserve its Title, and add to it an item stating at least the
%    title, year, new authors, and publisher of the Modified Version
%    as given on the Title Page.  If there is no section Entitled
%    \enquote{History} in the Document, create one stating the title,
%    year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given on its
%    Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified Version as
%    stated in the previous sentence.
%    
%  \item[J.]  Preserve the network location, if any, given in the
%    Document for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document,
%    and likewise the network locations given in the Document for
%    previous versions it was based on.  These may be placed in the
%    \enquote{History} section.  You may omit a network location for a
%    work that was published at least four years before the Document
%    itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to
%    gives permission.
%    
%  \item[K.]  For any section Entitled \enquote{Acknowledgements} or
%    \enquote{Dedications}, Preserve the Title of the section, and
%    preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the
%    contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.
%    
%  \item[L.]  Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
%    unaltered in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers or
%    the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
%    
%  \item[M.]  Delete any section Entitled \enquote{Endorsements}.
%    Such a section may not be included in the Modified Version.
%    
%  \item[N.]  Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled
%    \enquote{Endorsements} or to conflict in title with any Invariant
%    Section.
%    
%  \item[O.]  Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
% \end{itemize}
% 
% If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
% appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
% material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate
% some or all of these sections as invariant.  To do this, add their
% titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's
% license notice.  These titles must be distinct from any other
% section titles.
% 
% You may add a section Entitled \enquote{Endorsements}, provided it
% contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by
% various parties---for example, statements of peer review or that the
% text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative
% definition of a standard.
% 
% You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and
% a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the
% list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one passage of
% Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
% through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the Document
% already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added
% by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on
% behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one,
% on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the
% old one.
% 
% The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
% License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
% assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
% 
% \needspace{3\baselineskip}
% \begin{center}
%   {\large\bf 5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS\par}
% \end{center}
% 
% You may combine the Document with other documents released under
% this License, under the terms defined in section~4 above for
% modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all
% of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
% unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined
% work in its license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty
% Disclaimers.
% 
% The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
% multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
% copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
% but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
% by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original
% author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique
% number.  Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list
% of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
% 
% In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled
% \enquote{History} in the various original documents, forming one
% section Entitled \enquote{History}; likewise combine any sections
% Entitled \enquote{Acknowledgements}, and any sections Entitled
% \enquote{Dedications}.  You must delete all sections Entitled
% \enquote{Endorsements}.
% 
% \needspace{3\baselineskip}
% \begin{center}
%   {\large\bf 6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS\par}
% \end{center}
% 
% You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
% documents released under this License, and replace the individual
% copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
% that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
% rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents
% in all other respects.
% 
% You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
% distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a
% copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this
% License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that
% document.
% 
% \needspace{3\baselineskip}
% \begin{center}
% {\large\bf 7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS\par}
% \end{center}
% 
% A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate
% and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage
% or distribution medium, is called an \enquote{aggregate} if the
% copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the
% legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual
% works permit.  When the Document is included in an aggregate, this
% License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are
% not themselves derivative works of the Document.
% 
% If the Cover Text requirement of section~3 is applicable to these
% copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half
% of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on
% covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
% electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic
% form.  Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the
% whole aggregate.
% 
% \needspace{3\baselineskip}
% \begin{center}
%   {\large\bf 8. TRANSLATION\par}
% \end{center}
% 
% Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
% distribute translations of the Document under the terms of
% section~4.  Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires
% special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
% translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
% original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
% translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
% Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also
% include the original English version of this License and the
% original versions of those notices and disclaimers.  In case of a
% disagreement between the translation and the original version of
% this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will
% prevail.
% 
% If a section in the Document is Entitled \enquote{Acknowledgements},
% \enquote{Dedications}, or \enquote{History}, the requirement
% (section~4) to Preserve its Title (section~1) will typically require
% changing the actual title.
% 
% \needspace{3\baselineskip}
% \begin{center}
%   {\large\bf 9. TERMINATION\par}
% \end{center}
% 
% You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
% except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
% otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void, and
% will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
% 
% However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
% license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
% provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and
% finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the
% copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some
% reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
% 
% Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
% reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
% violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
% received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from
% that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days
% after your receipt of the notice.
% 
% Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the
% licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you
% under this License.  If your rights have been terminated and not
% permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the same
% material does not give you any rights to use it.
% 
% \needspace{3\baselineskip}
% \begin{center}
%   {\large\bf 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE\par}
% \end{center}
% 
% The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
% the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
% versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
% differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
% \url{https://www.gnu.org/licenses/}.
% 
% Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
% number.  If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
% version of this License \enquote{or any later version} applies to
% it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either
% of that specified version or of any later version that has been
% published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If the
% Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may
% choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free
% Software Foundation.  If the Document specifies that a proxy can
% decide which future versions of this License can be used, that
% proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently
% authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.
% 
% \needspace{3\baselineskip}
% \begin{center}
%   {\large\bf 11. RELICENSING\par}
% \end{center}
% 
% \enquote{Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site} (or \enquote{MMC
% Site}) means any World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable
% works and also provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit
% those works.  A public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of
% such a server.  A \enquote{Massive Multiauthor Collaboration} (or
% \enquote{MMC}) contained in the site means any set of copyrightable
% works thus published on the MMC site.
% 
% \enquote{CC-BY-SA} means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share
% Alike 3.0 license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a
% not-for-profit corporation with a principal place of business in San
% Francisco, California, as well as future copyleft versions of that
% license published by that same organization.
% 
% \enquote{Incorporate} means to publish or republish a Document, in
% whole or in part, as part of another Document.
% 
% An MMC is \enquote{eligible for relicensing} if it is licensed under
% this License, and if all works that were first published under this
% License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently incorporated
% in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover texts or
% invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior to November
% 1, 2008.
% 
% The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the
% site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1,
% 2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.
% 
% \needspace{3\baselineskip}
% \begin{center}
%   {\large\bf ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents\par}
% \end{center}
% 
% To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy
% of the License in the document and put the following copyright and
% license notices just after the title page:
% 
% \bigskip
% \begin{quote}
%   Copyright \copyright{} YEAR YOUR NAME.  Permission is granted to
%   copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of
%   the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later
%   version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
%   Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts.
%   A copy of the license is included in the section entitled
%   \enquote{GNU Free Documentation License}.
% \end{quote}
% \bigskip
%     
% If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover
% Texts, replace the \enquote{with \dots\ Texts.}\ line with this:
% 
% \bigskip
% \begin{quote}
%   with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
%   Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
% \end{quote}
% \bigskip
%     
% If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
% combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
% situation.
% 
% If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
% recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
% free software license, such as the GNU General Public License,
% to permit their use in free software.
%
% \section{References}
% \label{sec:references}
% \printbibliography[heading=none]
%
% \section{Sample: C. J. Caesar, \emph{Gallic War},
%           VI, XIII.1}
% \label{sec:caesar-gw-6-1-13}
% \subsection{\texttt{.tex} Source File}
% \label{sec:caesar-gw-tex}
% \inputminted[linenos=true]{latex}{samples/Caesar_BG-6-13-1.tex}
% \subsection{\texttt{TEI xml} Output}
% \label{sec:caesar-gw-tei}
% \inputminted[linenos=true]{xml}{samples/Caesar_BG-6-13-1-tei.xml}
% 
% \section{Arabic Sample File}
% \label{sec:arabic-sample}
% |arabic-sample.tex|:---
% \iffalse
%<*example>
% \fi
\begin{minted}[linenos=false]{latex}
% Instructions:
% 1. Compile this file three times.
%    - Open arabic-sample.pdf and arabic-sample-tei.xml and see the
%      result.
% 2. Compile arabic-sample_out.tex three times.
%    - Open arabic-sample_out.pdf and arabic-sample-out-tei.xml and
%      see the result.
%
\documentclass{article}

% The following three lines are only needed by the
% 'arabic-sample_out.tex' that arabluatex is instructed to produce:
\usepackage{babel}
\babelprovide[onchar=fonts]{arabic}
\babelfont[*arabic]{rm}{Amiri}

% instruct ekdosis to output TEI xml (arabic-sample-tei.xml):
\usepackage[teiexport=tidy]{ekdosis}

% instruct arabluatex to ouput sample-arabic_out.tex with Unicode
% Arabic strings in place of arabtex ASCII scheme:
\usepackage[fullvoc,export]{arabluatex}

\begin{document}

\begin{arabexport} % export arabtex strings to Unicode Arabic
  \begin{ekdosis}
    \begin{arab}
      'inna 'abI kAna mina 
      \app{
        \lem{'l-muqAtilaTi}
        \rdg{'l-muqAtilIna}
      }
      wa-kAnat 'ummI min `u.zamA'i buyUti 'l-zamAzimaTi.
    \end{arab}
  \end{ekdosis}
\end{arabexport}
\end{document}
\end{minted}
% \iffalse
%</example>
% \fi
%
% \StopEventually{}
% 
% \section{Implementation}
% \label{sec:implementation}
% 
% \iffalse
%<*package>
% \fi
% 
% \pkg{ekdosis} relies on Lua functions and tables. Read the
% |.lua| files that accompany \pkg{ekdosis} for more
% information.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{iftex}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Of course, \pkg{ekdosis} requires {\LuaLaTeX}. Issue an error
% if the document is processed with another engine.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequireLuaTeX
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set global options:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{expkv-opt}
\RequirePackage{expkv-def}
\newif\if@pkg@float
\newif\if@pkg@footins
\newif\if@pkg@ekddivs
\newif\if@parnotesroman
\newif\if@pkg@parnotes
\newif\iftei@export
\ekvdefinekeys{ekdosis}{
  choice layout = {float = {\@pkg@floattrue},
    footins = {\@pkg@floatfalse\@pkg@footinstrue}},
  initial layout = float,
  unknown-choice layout = \PackageError{ekdosis}{unknown
    layout=#1}{`layout' must be either `float' or `footins'.},
  choice divs = {ekdosis = {\@pkg@ekddivstrue},
    latex = {\@pkg@ekddivsfalse
      \AtBeginDocument{\luadirect{ekdosis.setekddivsfalse()}}}},
  initial divs = ekdosis,
  unknown-choice divs = \PackageError{ekdosis}{unknown divs=#1}{`divs'
    must be either `ekdosis' or `latex'.}, 
  choice parnotes = {false = {},
    true = {\@pkg@parnotestrue},
    roman = {\@pkg@parnotestrue\@parnotesromantrue}},
  default parnotes = true,
  unknown-choice parnotes = \PackageError{ekdosis}{unknown
    parnotes=#1}{`parnotes' must be either `true', or `false' or
    `roman'.},
  choice teiexport = {false = {},
    true = {\tei@exporttrue
      \AtBeginDocument{\luadirect{ekdosis.openteistream()}}%
      \AtEndDocument{\luadirect{ekdosis.closeteistream()}}},
    tidy = {\tei@exporttrue
      \AtBeginDocument{\luadirect{ekdosis.openteistream()}}%
      \AtEndDocument{\luadirect{ekdosis.closeteistream("tidy")}}}},
  default teiexport = true,
  unknown-choice teiexport = \PackageError{ekdosis}{unknown
    teiexport=#1}{`teiexport' must be either `true', `false' or
    `tidy'.}
}
\ekvoProcessLocalOptions{ekdosis}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \paragraph{Required Packages} \label{ref:ekdrequirements} In
% addition to \pkg{iftex}, \pkg{expkv-opt} and \pkg{expkv-def}, a list
% of the packages that are required by \pkg{ekdosis} follows:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
% \RequirePackage{iftex} % already loaded above
% \RequirePackage{expkv-opt} % already loaded above
% \RequirePackage{expkv-def} % already loaded above
\RequirePackage{luacode}
\RequirePackage{paracol}
\RequirePackage{xparse}
\RequirePackage{etoolbox}
\RequirePackage{lineno}
\RequirePackage{keyfloat}
\RequirePackage{refcount}
\RequirePackage{zref-user}
\RequirePackage{zref-abspage}
\RequirePackage{ltxcmds}
\RequirePackage{atbegshi}
\RequirePackage{ifoddpage}
\if@pkg@parnotes
  \RequirePackage{parnotes}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% \paragraph{Lua} Here begins the real work: load |ekdosis.lua|:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\luadirect{dofile(kpse.find_file("ekdosis.lua"))}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtEndDocument{
  \luadirect{ekdosis.closestream()}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\SetHooks} \cs{SetHooks} is used to set
%   hooks meant to be shared by all declared apparatuses, such as the
%   font size, the format of numerals, \emph{\&c.} This command can be
%   used in the preamble or at any point of the document.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ekvdefinekeys{ekd@hooks}{
  store appfontsize = \ekd@appfontsize,
  store refnumstyle = \ekd@refnumstyle,
  store postrefnum = \ekd@postrefnum,
  initial appfontsize = \footnotesize,
  initial refnumstyle = \bfseries,
  initial postrefnum = ~
}
\NewDocumentCommand{\SetHooks}{m}{\ekvset{ekd@hooks}{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Build and process the list of witnesses and hands:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ekvdefinekeys{ekd@witness}{
  store settlement = \settlement@value,
  store institution = \institution@value,
  store repository = \repository@value,
  store collection = \collection@value,
  store idno = \idno@value,
  store msName = \msName@value,
  store origDate = \origDate@value
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareWitness} \cs{DeclareWitness} is a
%   preamble-only command. It takes three mandatory arguments and one
%   optional argument. It is meant to collect data related to
%   witnesses to be used in the edition text. Data are stored in |Lua|
%   tables and are used to encode the |<listWit>| part of the |TEI|
%   header as well as the Conspectus Siglorum in the edition in print.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\DeclareWitness}{m m m O{}}{%
  \bgroup
  \ekvset{ekd@witness}{#4}
    \luadirect{ekdosis.newwitness(
      \luastringN{#1},
      \luastringN{#2},
      \luastringN{#3},
      \luastringO{\settlement@value},
      \luastringO{\institution@value},
      \luastringO{\repository@value},
      \luastringO{\collection@value},
      \luastringO{\idno@value},
      \luastringO{\msName@value},
      \luastringO{\origDate@value})}
    \egroup
  }
\@onlypreamble\DeclareWitness
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareHand} As \cs{DeclareWitness}, \cs{DeclareHand}
%   is a preamble-only command meant to collect data and store them in
%   |Lua| tables. It takes three mandatory arguments and one optional
%   argument. The second argument is used to connect the hand to a
%   declared witness it is related to. Then the table in which this
%   witness is recorded can be fed with new data.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\DeclareHand}{m m m +O{}}{
  \luadirect{ekdosis.newhand(\luastringN{#1},
    \luastringN{#2},
    \luastringN{#3},
    \luastringN{#4})}
}
\@onlypreamble\DeclareHand
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareScholar} There is also a table in which are
%   collected data related to scholars' names to be used in the
%   apparatus criticus. \cs{DeclareScholar} is a preamble-only command
%   and takes two mandatory arguments: a unique id and a shorthand to
%   be used in the apparatus criticus which can be extracted from a
%   bibliographic database.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\DeclareScholar}{m m}{
  \luadirect{ekdosis.newscholar(\luastringN{#1},
    \luastringN{#2})}
}
\@onlypreamble\DeclareScholar
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareShorthand} \cs{DeclareShorthand} is a
%   preamble-only command that can be used to record manuscript
%   families or any kind of shorthand to be used to refer to
%   previously declared ids, for example the shorthand |codd| can be
%   used to point to all declared witnesses. This command takes three
%   mandatory arguments: a unique id, its rendition in print and a
%   csv-list of previously declared ids.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\DeclareShorthand}{m m m}{
  \luadirect{ekdosis.newshorthand(\luastringN{#1},
    \luastringN{#2},
    \luastringN{#3})}
}
\@onlypreamble\DeclareShorthand
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\getsiglum}
% \cs{getsiglum}\marg{csv list} takes a comma-separated list of
% declared ids by means of \cs{DeclareWitness}, \cs{DeclareHand},
% \cs{DeclareShorthand} or \cs{DeclareScholar} and returns their
% respective renditions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\getsiglum}{m}{%
  \luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getsiglum(\luastringN{#1}))}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\SigLine}
% \cs{Sigline}\marg{unique id} takes the unique id of any declared
% witness by means of \cs{DeclareWitness} as argument and returns a
% line ready to be inserted in a table set to print a Conspectus
% Siglorum. \cs{SigLine} returns three fields separated by the symbol
% |&| that is used in tables as follows: the siglum referring to the
% witness, the contents of the |description| field and the contents of
% the optional |origDate| field.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\SigLine}{m}{%
  \luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.basic_cs(\luastringN{#1}))}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \paragraph{\TeX\ to \texttt{TEI xml}}
% Here follow the |key-value| options to be used by \cs{SetTEIxmlExport}
% below:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ekvdefinekeys{tei@settings}{
  choice autopar = {true = \luadirect{ekdosis.setteiautopar("yes")},
    false = {\luadirect{ekdosis.setteiautopar("no")}}},
  initial autopar = true,
  unknown-choice autopar = \PackageError{ekdosis}{unknown
    autopar=#1}{`autopar' must be either `true' or `false'.}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\SetTEIxmlExport}
% \cs{SetTEIxmlExport} collects the settings to be applied
% to \texttt{TEI xml} export. For now, there is only one option. This
% command can be used at any point of the document, except inside
% environments meant to receive an apparatus criticus.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\SetTEIxmlExport}{m}{
  \unless\ifekd@state\ekvset{tei@settings}{#1}\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% The following three commands can be used to instruct \pkg{ekdosis}
% how to convert unknown or unusual \hologo{(La)TeX} commands into
% \texttt{TEI xml} equivalents.
% \begin{macro}{\TeXtoTEI}
% \cs{TeXtoTEI}\marg{csname}\marg{TEI element}\oarg{TEI attribute(s)}
% takes two mandatory arguments and one optional argument, namely: the
% control sequence name to be converted, the \texttt{TEI} element it
% is to be converted into and any additional \texttt{xml} attributes
% to be appended to the opening \texttt{TEI} element:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\TeXtoTEI}{m m O{}}{%
  \luadirect{ekdosis.newcmdtotag(\luastringN{#1},
    \luastringN{#2},
    \luastringN{#3})}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\EnvtoTEI}
% \begin{macro}{\EnvtoTEI*}
% \cs{EnvtoTEI}\meta{*}\marg{env name}\marg{TEI element}\oarg{TEI
% attribute(s)} instructs how to convert \LaTeX{} environments into
% \texttt{TEI xml} equivalents. It takes two mandatory arguments and
% one optional argument, namely the name of the \LaTeX{} environment
% to be converted, the \texttt{TEI} element it is to be converted into
% and any additional attributes to be appended to the \texttt{TEI}
% opening element. \cs{EnvtoTEI*} is restricted to \texttt{TEI}
% elements that must never appear within |<p>| elements, such as
% |<div>|, |<lg>| and the like.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\EnvtoTEI}{s m m O{}}{%
  \IfBooleanTF{#1}{%
  \luadirect{ekdosis.newenvtotag(\luastringN{#2},
    \luastringN{#3},
    \luastringN{#4},
    "yes")}
  }{%
  \luadirect{ekdosis.newenvtotag(\luastringN{#2},
    \luastringN{#3},
    \luastringN{#4})}
  }
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\TeXtoTEIPatt}
% Finally, the more flexible\---and more delicate to
% handle\---\cs{TeXtoTEIPatt}\marg{\TeX\
% pattern}\allowbreak\marg{\texttt{TEI} pattern} uses pattern matching
% to instruct \pkg{ekdosis} how to convert \hologo{(La)TeX} commands
% into \texttt{TEI} equivalents.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\TeXtoTEIPatt}{m m}{%
  \luadirect{ekdosis.newpatttotag(\luastringN{#1}, \luastringN{#2})}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\SetTEIFilename} \cs{SetTEIFilename}\marg{basename} is
%   a preamble-only command. It is used to set the base name of the
%   |TEI xml| output file, to which the suffix |.xml| is appended. By
%   default, the base name is |\jobname-tei|:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\SetTEIFileName}{m}{
  \luadirect{ekdosis.setteifilename(\luastringN{#1})}
}
\@onlypreamble\SetTEIFileName
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\SetxmlBibResource} This is a preamble-only command.
%   If a base name for a \texttt{TEI xml} compliant bibliographical
%   database file is provided with
%   \cs{SetxmlBibResource}\marg{basename}, \pkg{ekdosis} will use it
%   and insert formatted data in the back matter section of its own
%   \texttt{TEI xml} output file, as |<biblStruct>| elements within a
%   |<listBibl>| section.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\SetxmlBibResource}{m}{
  \luadirect{ekdosis.setxmlbibresource(\luastringN{#1})}
}
\@onlypreamble\SetxmlBibResource
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%\paragraph{Multi-layer apparatuses}
% \pkg{ekdosis} must know if an entry is to be processed in a single-
% or multiple-layer context:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifekd@mapps
%    \end{macrocode}
% Now the key-value options can be defined:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ekvdefinekeys{ekd@newapp}{
  choice direction = {LR = \def\direction@val{LR},
                      RL = \def\direction@val{RL}},
  unknown-choice direction = \PackageError{ekdosis}{unknown
    direction=#1}{`direction' must be either `LR' or `RL'.},
  store rule = \rule@val,
  nmeta norule = {rule=none},
  code delim = \def\delim@val{\unexpanded{#1}},
  store sep = \sep@val,
  store bhook = \bhook@val,
  store ehook = \ehook@val,
  store maxentries = \limit@val,
  initial direction = LR,
  initial delim = {},
  initial ehook = {\csname ekd@end@apparatus\endcsname}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareApparatus}
% \cs{DeclareApparatus}\marg{apparatus name}\oarg{options} is a
% preamble-only command. As a mandatory argument, it takes the name of
% the new layer of notes to be inserted in the apparatus block. Then,
% the following seven key-value options can be used to lay out the
% layer: \verb+direction=LR|RL+, |rule|, |delim| (the delimiter between
% entries), |sep| (the separator between lemma part and readings or
% notes), |bhook| (\LaTeX{} code inserted as the layer begins),
% |ehook| (\LaTeX{} code inserted as the layer ends), |maxentries|
% (if set and |maxentries >= 10|, the number of entries at which a
% \cs{pagebreak} is issued):---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\DeclareApparatus}{m O{}}{
  \newbool{subsq@unit@#1}
  \booltrue{subsq@unit@#1}
  \unless\ifekd@mapps\global\ekd@mappstrue\fi
  \bgroup
  \ekvset{ekd@newapp}{#2}
  \luadirect{ekdosis.newapparatus(
    \luastringN{#1},
    \luastring{\direction@val},
    \luastringO{\rule@val},
    \luastringO{\delim@val},
    \luastringO{\sep@val},
    \luastringO{\bhook@val},
    \luastringO{\ehook@val},
    \luastringO{\limit@val}
    )}
  \egroup
}
\@onlypreamble\DeclareApparatus
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Apparatus-related settings and functions. Some booleans to check if
% an apparatus should be inserted and what is the current environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newbool{do@app}
\newif\ifekd@state
\newif\ifekd@isinapp
\newif\ifekd@isinlem
%    \end{macrocode}
% The next boolean is shared with \pkg{arabluatex}. \cs{LRnum} is used
% internally to ensure that numerals referring to line spans are
% displayed in the right order.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providebool{al@rlmode}
\@ifpackageloaded{arabluatex}{}{%
  \def\setRL{\booltrue{al@rlmode}\pardir TRT\textdir TRT}
  \def\setLR{\boolfalse{al@rlmode}\pardir TLT \textdir TLT}
}
\protected\def\LRnum#1{\bgroup\textdir TLT#1\egroup}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set counter referring to line numbers and make it global. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{ekd@lab}
\globalcounter{ekd@lab}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This command inserts words in the apparatus criticus without
% checking if both |ekd@isinapp| and |ekd@state| are set to |true|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\unconditional@appin}{o m}{%
  \IfNoValueTF{#1}
  {\luadirect{ekdosis.appin(\luastringO{#2})}}
  {\luadirect{ekdosis.appin(\luastringO{#2}, \luastringO{#1})}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\blfootnote} \cs{blfootnote}\marg{footnote} is used
% internally to insert the apparatus in the footnote block should the
% global optional argument |layout| be set to |footins|. Therefore, it
% is not documented.
%    \begin{macrocode}
 % \def\blfootnote{\gdef\@thefnmark{\relax}\@footnotetext}
\def\blfootnote{\gdef\@thefnmark{}\@blfootnotetext}
\long\def\@blfootnotetext#1{\insert\footins{%
    \reset@font\footnotesize
    \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
    \splittopskip\footnotesep
    \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
    \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
    \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
       \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
    }%
    \color@begingroup
      \@makeblfntext{%
        \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
    \color@endgroup}}%
\newcommand\@makeblfntext[1]{%
    \parindent 1em%
    \noindent
    \hb@xt@0em{\hss\@makefnmark}#1}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \paragraph{Single-layer apparatus} The following commands are for
% general settings. All of them can be used in the preamble or at any
% point of the document.  The keys to be used follow:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifrtl@app
\edef\ekdsep{] }
\ekvdefinekeys{default@app}{
  choice direction = {LR = \rtl@appfalse,
    RL = \rtl@apptrue},
  unknown-choice direction = \PackageError{ekdosis}{unknown
    direction=#1}{`direction' must be either `LR' or `RL'.},
  code sep = \edef\ekdsep{#1},
  store bhook = \ekd@begin@apparatus,
  initial bhook = {},
  store ehook = \ekd@end@apparatus,
  initial ehook = {},
  store delim = \ekd@unit@delim,
  initial delim = {},
  store rule = \ekd@default@rule,
  initial rule = \rule{0.4\columnwidth}{0.4pt},
  noval norule = \def\ekd@default@rule{\mbox{}}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\SetApparatus}
% All settings can also be defined as |key-value| options within the
% argument of \cs{SetApparatus}:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\SetApparatus}{m}{
  \ekvset{default@app}{#1}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\SetLTRapp}
% \begin{macro}{\SetRTLapp}
% \cs{SetLTRapp} and \cs{SetRTLapp} are two argument-less commands to
% set the direction of single-layer apparatus criticus, either LTR or
% RTL:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\SetRTLapp}{}{\rtl@apptrue}
\NewDocumentCommand{\SetLTRapp}{}{\rtl@appfalse}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\SetSeparator}
% \cs{SetSeparator}\marg{separator} allows to change the separator
% between lemma texts and variant readings, which is by default
% a closing square bracket followed by a space (\verb*+] +):---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\SetSeparator}{m}{\edef\ekdsep{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\SetBeginApparatus}
%   \cs{SetBeginApparatus}\marg{characters} can be used to append
%   characters at the beginning of the apparatus block. By default,
%   nothing is appended:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\SetBeginApparatus}{m}{\edef\ekd@begin@apparatus{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\SetEndApparatus}
% \cs{SetEndApparatus}\marg{characters} can be used to append
% characters at the end of the apparatus block\---such as a period,
% as it is customary in some editions. By default, nothing is
% appended:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\SetEndApparatus}{m}{\edef\ekd@end@apparatus{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\SetUnitDelimiter}
% \cs{SetUnitDelimiter}\marg{delimiter} can be used to set the
% delimiter between entries in the apparatus criticus. By default,
% there is no delimiter except a simple space. \cs{SetUnitDelimiter}
% can be used to insert a broad space (with |\hskip| for instance, as
% in the OCT series) or the divider-sign (‖, as in the Budé series):---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\SetUnitDelimiter}{m}{\def\ekd@unit@delim{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\footnoteruletrue}
% \begin{macro}{\footnoterulefalse}
% As \pkg{ekdosis} takes care of drawing a rule separating the main
% text from the apparatus block as well as layers of notes from each
% other inside this block, it may not be desirable to have
% the standard \LaTeX{} \enquote{footnoterule} printed on every page
% of the edition text. \cs{footnoterulefalse} removes it while
% \cs{footnoteruletrue} leaves it untouched. The latter is set by
% default.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\iffootnoterule
\footnoteruletrue
\let\dflt@footnoterule\footnoterule
\let\dflt@pcol@footnoterule\pcol@footnoterule
\renewcommand\footnoterule{%
  \iffootnoterule
  \dflt@footnoterule%
  \fi
}
\renewcommand\pcol@footnoterule{%
  \iffootnoterule
  \dflt@pcol@footnoterule%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\SetDefaultRule}
%   By default, \pkg{ekdosis} draws separating rules the definition of
%   which is |\rule{0.4\columnwid|\allowbreak|th}{0.4pt}|. This can be
%   changed in the preamble or at any point of the document with
%   \cs{SetDefaultRule}\marg{\allowbreak{}rule definition}. Leaving
%   this argument empty as in \cs{SetDefaultRule}|{}| removes the
%   rule.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\SetDefaultRule}{m}{%
  \def\@tempa{#1}
  \ifx\@tempa\empty\def\ekd@default@rule{\mbox{}}%
  \else%
  \def\ekd@default@rule{#1}%
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\NLS}
% \cs{NLS} is adapted from a snippet written by Heiko Oberdiek. It is
% used by \pkg{ekdosis} internally to prevent page breaks between
% separating rules and subsequent notes. Therefore, it is not
% documented.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\NLS}{%
  \par%
  \nobreak%
  \vspace{-\parskip}%
  \noindent%
  \ignorespaces}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% This boolean is used to test if a given entry is to be preceded by a
% numeral referring to the line of the edition text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifsubsq@unit
\subsq@unittrue
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{add@@apparatus} inserts the apparatus block on a given page
% either in the footnote floating block or in a float of its own,
% depending on the value set in the |layout| global option.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\add@@apparatus{%
  \if@pkg@parnotes\parnotes\else\fi%
  \if@pkg@footins%
  \bgroup%
  \ifrtl@app\setRL\else\setLR\fi%
  \blfootnote{%
    \if@pkg@parnotes%
    \if@parnotesroman%
    \renewcommand*{\theparnotemark}{\roman{parnotemark}}\else\fi%
    \parnoteclear\else\fi%
    \footnotesize\apparatus\unless\ifekd@mapps\ekd@end@apparatus\fi%
    \if@pkg@parnotes\parnotes\parnotereset\else\fi%
  }%
  \egroup%
  \fi%
  \if@pkg@float%
  \keyparbox[!b]{}{\ifrtl@app\setRL\else\setLR\fi%
    \if@pkg@parnotes%
    \if@parnotesroman%
    \renewcommand*{\theparnotemark}{\roman{parnotemark}}\else\fi%
    \parnoteclear\else\fi%
    \ekd@appfontsize\apparatus\unless\ifekd@mapps\ekd@end@apparatus\fi%
    \if@pkg@parnotes\parnotes\parnotereset\else\fi%
  }%
  \fi%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Before inserting any new entry, \cs{add@apparatus} calls
% \cs{test@apparatus} to decide whether a new apparatus block must be
% created on a given page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\add@apparatus{%
  \test@apparatus%
  \ifbool{do@app}{\subsq@unitfalse\add@@apparatus}{}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{append@app} inserts a bare (sub)entry in the apparatus...
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\append@app}{o +m}{%
  \ifekd@isinapp%
    \ifekd@state%
    \IfNoValueTF{#1}%
      {\luadirect{ekdosis.appin(\luastringO{#2})}}%
      {\luadirect{ekdosis.appin(\luastringO{#2}, \luastringO{#1})}}%
    \fi%
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% while \cs{append@ln@app} inserts a (sub)entry possibly preceded by a
% line number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\append@ln@app}{o +m}{%
  \IfNoValueTF{#1}
  {\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.mdvappend(\luastringO{#2}))}}
  {\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.mdvappend(\luastringO{#2},
      \luastringO{#1}))}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \paragraph{Lineation settings}
% \begin{macro}{\outerlinenumbers}
% \begin{macro}{\innerlinenumbers}
% \pkg{ekdosis} does not use the \enquote{pagewise} numbering mode
% that is provided by \pkg{lineno}. Therefore,
% \cs{outerlinenumbers} and \cs{innerlinenumbers} are defined in
% addition to \cs{rightlinenum{\allowbreak}bers} and
% \cs{leftlinenumbers}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\outerlinenumbers{
  \def\makeLineNumberRunning{
    \checkoddpage
    \ifoddpage
    \linenumberfont\hskip\linenumbersep\hskip\textwidth
    \hbox to\linenumberwidth{\hss\LineNumber}\hss
    \else
    \hss\linenumberfont\LineNumber\hskip\linenumbersep
    \fi
  }
}
\def\innerlinenumbers{
  \def\makeLineNumberRunning{
    \checkoddpage
    \ifoddpage
    \hss\linenumberfont\LineNumber\hskip\linenumbersep
    \else
    \linenumberfont\hskip\linenumbersep\hskip\textwidth
    \hbox to\linenumberwidth{\hss\LineNumber}\hss
    \fi
  }
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% The keys to be used for lineation settings follow. A conditional is
% defined beforehand so that \pkg{ekdosis} may know whether the
% numbering should start afresh at the top of each page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifekd@pagelineation
\NewDocumentCommand{\ekdatbegshihook}{}{%
  \ifekd@pagelineation\resetlinenumber\fi
}
\AtBeginShipout{\ekdatbegshihook}
\newif\ifekd@elidednumbers
\ekvdefinekeys{ekd@lineation}{
  choice lineation = {page = \ekd@pagelineationtrue,
    document = \ekd@pagelineationfalse},
  unknown-choice lineation = \PackageError{ekdosis}{unknown
    lineation=#1}{`lineation' must be either `page' or `document'.},
  code modulonum = \chardef\c@linenumbermodulo#1\relax,
  noval modulo = \modulolinenumbers,
  choice numbers = {elided = \ekd@elidednumberstrue,
    full = \ekd@elidednumbersfalse},
  unknown-choice numbers = \PackageError{ekdosis}{unknown
    numbers=#1}{`numbers' must be either `elided' or `full'.},
  initial numbers = elided,
  choice margin = {right = \rightlinenumbers,
    left = \leftlinenumbers,
    inner = \innerlinenumbers,
    outer = \outerlinenumbers},
  unknown-choice margin = \PackageError{ekdosis}{unknown
    margin=#1}{`margin' must be either `left', `right', \MessageBreak
    `inner' or `outer'}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\SetLineation}
% Then \cs{SetLineation}\marg{options} can be used in the preamble or
% at any point of the document to set lineation preferences. Its
% argument processes the |key-value| options that are defined just
% above.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\SetLineation}{m}{
  \ekvset{ekd@lineation}{#1}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Use |\normalfont| for line numbers:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand\linenumberfont{\normalfont\footnotesize}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\SetDefaultApparatus}
% By default, \pkg{ekdosis} defines one layer of critical notes which
% is called |default|. This name can be changed at any point of the
% document with \cs{SetDefaultApparatus}\marg{name}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ekvdefinekeys{appnote}{
   store type = \ekdan@type,
   initial type = default
 }
\NewDocumentCommand{\SetDefaultApparatus}{m}{%
  \ekvset{appnote}{type=#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\app}
% \cs{app}|[type=|\meta{type}|]|\marg{apparatus entries} takes one
% mandatory argument and accepts one optional argument. |type=| refers
% to the layer the note must go into and \meta{apparatus entries}
% contains command used to insert the entries, either \cs{lem},
% \cs{rdg} or \cs{note}\meta{*}:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\app}{O{} > { \TrimSpaces } +m}{%
  \begingroup
  \ekvset{appnote}{#1}%
  \ekd@isinapptrue%
  \stepcounter{ekd@lab}%
  \zlabel{ekd:\theekd@lab}%
  \luadirect{ekdosis.storeabspg(
    \luastring{\zref@extract{ekd:\theekd@lab}{abspage}})}%
  \ifekd@state\add@apparatus\fi%
  \luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.removesp(\luastringN{#2}))}%
  \ekd@isinappfalse%
  \endgroup}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \cs{current@ref@arg} is used outside \cs{app} by \cs{note}. It takes
% two mandatory arguments: the beginning line label and the ending
% line label\---which are manually inserted---and returns the formatted
% reference to be inserted in the apparatus criticus.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\current@ref@arg#1#2{{%\textdir TLT%
    \unexpanded\expandafter{\ekd@refnumstyle}%
    \ifnum%
    \getpagerefnumber{#1}
    =
    \getpagerefnumber{#2}
    \ifnum%
    \getrefnumber{#1}
    =
    \getrefnumber{#2}
    % 
    \ifekd@mapps%
    \ifbool{subsq@unit@\ekdan@type}{%
      \ifnum%
      \getrefnumber{#1}
      =
      \getrefnumber{\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getprevnotelab())}}
      \else
      \LRnum{\getrefnumber{#1}}% issue the no
      \fi%
    }%
    {\LRnum{\getrefnumber{#1}}}% issue the no
    \else
    \ifsubsq@unit%
    % 
    \ifnum%
    \getrefnumber{#1}
    =
    \getrefnumber{\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getprevnotelab())}}
    \else
    \LRnum{\getrefnumber{#1}}% issue the no
    \fi
    % 
    \else
    \LRnum{\getrefnumber{#1}}% issue the no
    \fi
    \fi
    % 
    \else
    \ifekd@elidednumbers
    \luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.numrange(\luastring{\getrefnumber{#1}},
      \luastring{\getrefnumber{#2}}))}%
    \else
    \LRnum{\getrefnumber{#1}}--%
    \LRnum{\getrefnumber{#2}}% issue the nos
    \fi
    \fi%
    \else
    \LRnum{\getrefnumber{#1}}--%
    \LRnum{\getpagerefnumber{#2}}.%
    \LRnum{\getrefnumber{#2}}% issue pg and ln nos
    \fi%
  }\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekd@postrefnum}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{current@ref} is pretty much the same as \cs{current@reg@arg},
% but takes no argument. It is used by commands such as \cs{lem} when
% references to page and line numbers can be returned by \textsf{Lua}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\current@ref{{%\textdir TLT%
    \unexpanded\expandafter{\ekd@refnumstyle}%
    \ifnum%
    \getpagerefnumber{\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getlnlab())}-b}
    =
    \getpagerefnumber{\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getlnlab())}-e}
    \ifnum%
    \getrefnumber{\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getlnlab())}-b}
    =
    \getrefnumber{\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getlnlab())}-e}
    % 
    \ifekd@mapps%
    \ifbool{subsq@unit@\ekdan@type}{%
      \ifnum%
      \getrefnumber{\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getlnlab())}-b}
      =
      \getrefnumber{\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getprevlnlab())}-b}
      \else
      \LRnum{\getrefnumber{\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getlnlab())}-b}}% issue the no
      \fi%
    }{\LRnum{\getrefnumber{\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getlnlab())}-b}}}% issue the no
    \else
    \ifsubsq@unit%
    % 
    \ifnum%
    \getrefnumber{\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getlnlab())}-b}
    =
    \getrefnumber{\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getprevlnlab())}-b}
    \else
    \LRnum{\getrefnumber{\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getlnlab())}-b}}% issue the no
    \fi
    % 
    \else
    \LRnum{\getrefnumber{\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getlnlab())}-b}}% issue the no
    \fi
    \fi
    % 
    \else
    \ifekd@elidednumbers
    \luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.numrange(
      \luastring{\getrefnumber{\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getlnlab())}-b}},
      \luastring{\getrefnumber{\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getlnlab())}-e}}))}% issue the nos
    \else
    \LRnum{\getrefnumber{\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getlnlab())}-b}}--%
    \LRnum{\getrefnumber{\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getlnlab())}-e}}% issue the nos
    \fi
    \fi%
    \else
    \LRnum{\getrefnumber{\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getlnlab())}-b}}--%
    \LRnum{\getpagerefnumber{\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getlnlab())}-e}}.%
    \LRnum{\getrefnumber{\luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getlnlab())}-e}}% issue pg and ln nos
    \fi%
  }\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekd@postrefnum}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define keys to be used by the optional arguments of \cs{lem} and
% \cs{rdg}:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ekvdefinekeys{lem}{
  code wit = \def\ekdlr@wit{#1},
  code alt  = \def\ekdlr@alt{#1},
  code pre = \def\ekdlr@pre{#1},
  code post = \def\ekdlr@post{#1},
  code prewit = \def\ekdlr@prewit{#1},
  code postwit = \def\ekdlr@postwit{#1},
  store type = \ekdlr@type,
  store sep = \ekdl@sep,
  bool nolem = \ifekdl@nolem,
  bool nosep = \ifekdl@nosep,
  initial sep = \ekdsep
}
\ekvdefinekeys{rdg}{
  code wit = \def\ekdlr@wit{#1},
  code alt  = \def\ekdlr@alt{#1},
  code pre = \def\ekdlr@pre{#1},
  code post = \def\ekdlr@post{#1},
  code prewit = \def\ekdlr@prewit{#1},
  code postwit = \def\ekdlr@postwit{#1},
  store type = \ekdlr@type,
  bool nordg = \ifekdr@nordg
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\lem}
% \cs{lem}\oarg{options}\marg{lemma text} inserts \meta{lemma text}
% both in the edition text and in the apparatus criticus by default,
% preceded by the reference to the line number or a space if it is the
% same number as the one of the previous entry. This command accepts
% the optional key-value arguments just defined above.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\lem}{O{} m}{%
  \ekd@isinlemtrue%
  \luadirect{ekdosis.dolnlab(\luastringN{#2})}%
  \null
  \bgroup%
  \ekvset{lem}{#1}%
  \ifekd@mapps%
    \ifnum%
    \luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.get_bagunits(\luastringO{\ekdan@type}))}
    = 1
    \boolfalse{subsq@unit@\ekdan@type}%
    \fi%
    \luadirect{ekdosis.increment_bagunits(\luastringO{\ekdan@type})}%
    \def\ekd@munit@delim{%
      \luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getappdelim(\luastringO{\ekdan@type}))}}%
    \luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.limit_bagunits(\luastringO{\ekdan@type}))}%
  \fi%
  \ifekdl@nolem\edef\lem@app{%
    % \hskip .75em
    \ifekd@mapps
    \ifbool{subsq@unit@\ekdan@type}%
    {\ekd@munit@delim}{}%
    \else%
    \ifsubsq@unit\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekd@unit@delim}\fi%
    \fi%
    \current@ref}%\hskip .25em}%
  \else%
  \ifbool{al@rlmode}{%
    \edef\lem@app{%
      % \hskip .75em
      \ifekd@mapps
      \ifbool{subsq@unit@\ekdan@type}%
      {\ekd@munit@delim}{}%
      \else%
      \ifsubsq@unit\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekd@unit@delim}\fi%
      \fi%
      \current@ref%\hskip .25em
      \ifdefined\ekdlr@alt%
        \ifdefined\ekdlr@post%
          \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@post}\space\else\fi
        {\textdir TRT\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@alt}}%
        \ifdefined\ekdlr@pre%
          \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@pre}\space\else\fi
      \else
        \ifdefined\ekdlr@post%
          \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@post}\space\else\fi
        {\textdir TRT\unexpanded{#2}}%
        \ifdefined\ekdlr@pre%
          \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@pre}\space\else\fi
      \fi
      \ifdefined\ekdlr@postwit%
        \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@postwit}\else\fi
      \ifdefined\ekdlr@wit\space\getsiglum{\ekdlr@wit}\else\fi
      \ifdefined\ekdlr@prewit%
        \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@prewit}\space\else\fi
      \ifekdl@nosep\else\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdl@sep}\fi
    }%
  }%
  {%
    \edef\lem@app{%
      % \hskip .75em
      \ifekd@mapps
      \ifbool{subsq@unit@\ekdan@type}%
      {\ekd@munit@delim}{}%
      \else%
      \ifsubsq@unit\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekd@unit@delim}\fi%
      \fi%
      \current@ref%\hskip .25em
      \ifdefined\ekdlr@alt%
        \ifdefined\ekdlr@pre%
          \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@pre}\space\else\fi
        \ltx@ifpackageloaded{babel}%
          {\noexpand\selectlanguage{\languagename}%
            \unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@alt}}%
          {\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@alt}}%
        \ifdefined\ekdlr@post%
          \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@post}\space\else\fi
      \else
        \ifdefined\ekdlr@pre%
          \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@pre}\space\else\fi
          \ltx@ifpackageloaded{babel}%
          {{\noexpand\selectlanguage{\languagename}\unexpanded{#2}}}{%
            {\unexpanded{#2}}}%
        \ifdefined\ekdlr@post%
          \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@post}\space\else\fi
      \fi
      \ifdefined\ekdlr@prewit%
        \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@prewit}\space\else\fi
      \ifdefined\ekdlr@wit\space\getsiglum{\ekdlr@wit}\else\fi
      \ifdefined\ekdlr@postwit%
        \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@postwit}\else\fi
      \ifekdl@nosep\else\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdl@sep}\fi
    }%
  }%
  \fi%
  \ifekd@mapps%
  \append@ln@app[\ekdan@type]{\lem@app}%
  \else%
  \append@ln@app{\lem@app}%
  \fi%
  \egroup%
  \ekd@isinlemfalse%
  \subsq@unittrue%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\rdg}
% \cs{rdg}\oarg{options}\marg{variant reading} inserts \meta{variant
% reading} in the second part of the entry, after the lemma text and
% the separator, in the apparatus criticus. This command accepts the
% optional key-value arguments defined above.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\rdg}{O{} m}{%
  \bgroup%
  \ekvset{rdg}{#1}%
  % \ifekdr@nordg\append@app{}\else% do we need \append@app{} here? If
  %                               % so, keep in mind \ifekd@mapps,
  %                               like so:
  \ifekdr@nordg%
    \ifekd@mapps%
      \append@app[\ekdan@type]{}%
    \else%
    \append@app{}%
    \fi%
  \else%
  \ifbool{al@rlmode}{%
    \edef\rdg@app{%
      \ifdefined\ekdlr@alt%
        \ifdefined\ekdlr@post%
          \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@post}\space\else\fi
        {\textdir TRT\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@alt}}%
        \ifdefined\ekdlr@pre%
          \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@pre}\space\else\fi
      \else
        \ifdefined\ekdlr@post%
          \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@post}\space\else\fi
        {\textdir TRT\unexpanded{#2}}%
        \ifdefined\ekdlr@pre%
          \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@pre}\space\else\fi
      \fi
      \ifdefined\ekdlr@postwit%
        \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@postwit}\else\fi
      \ifdefined\ekdlr@wit\space\getsiglum{\ekdlr@wit}\else\fi
      \ifdefined\ekdlr@prewit%
        \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@prewit}\space\else\fi
    }%
  }%
  {%
    \edef\rdg@app{%
      \ifdefined\ekdlr@alt%
        \ifdefined\ekdlr@pre%
          \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@pre}\space\else\fi
        \ltx@ifpackageloaded{babel}%
          {\noexpand\selectlanguage{\languagename}%
            \unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@alt}}%
          {\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@alt}}%
        \ifdefined\ekdlr@post%
          \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@post}\space\else\fi
      \else
        \ifdefined\ekdlr@pre%
          \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@pre}\space\else\fi
          \ltx@ifpackageloaded{babel}%
          {{\noexpand\selectlanguage{\languagename}\unexpanded{#2}}}{%
            {\unexpanded{#2}}}%
        \ifdefined\ekdlr@post%
          \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@post}\space\else\fi
      \fi
      \ifdefined\ekdlr@prewit%
        \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@prewit}\space\else\fi
      \ifdefined\ekdlr@wit\space\getsiglum{\ekdlr@wit}\else\fi
      \ifdefined\ekdlr@postwit%
        \space\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdlr@postwit}\else\fi
    }%
  }%
  \ifekd@mapps%
      \append@app[\ekdan@type]{\rdg@app}%
  \else%
  \append@app{\rdg@app}%
  \fi%
  \fi%
  \egroup%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Define keys to be used by the optional argument of \cs{note} when
% this command is found outside \cs{app}:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ekvdefinekeys{note}{
  store type = \ekdan@type,
  store lem = \ekdn@lem,
  code labelb = \def\ekdn@labelb{#1},
  code labele = \def\ekdn@labele{#1},
  store sep = \ekdn@sep,
  bool nosep = \ifekdn@nosep,
  initial type = default,
  initial sep = \ekdsep
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{note@noapp} is used internally when a \cs{note} command is found
% outside \cs{app}. This command is mostly used to insert short
% comments or references to texts quoted or cited in the edition text
% to go into additional layers of the apparatus criticus, e.g.\ the
% \emph{apparatus testium}. It accepts the optional key-value
% arguments just defined above. It must be noted that |labelb| must be
% specified; otherwise \pkg{ekdosis} will issue an error message.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\note@noapp}{O{} +m}{%
  \null
  \bgroup%
  \ekvset{note}{#1}%
  \stepcounter{ekd@lab}%
  \zlabel{ekd:\theekd@lab}%
  \luadirect{ekdosis.storeabspg(
    \luastring{\zref@extract{ekd:\theekd@lab}{abspage}})}%
  \ifekd@state\add@apparatus\fi%
  \ifekd@mapps%
    \ifnum%
      \luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.get_bagunits(\luastringO{\ekdan@type}))}
      = 1
      \boolfalse{subsq@unit@\ekdan@type}%
    \fi%
  \luadirect{ekdosis.increment_bagunits(\luastringO{\ekdan@type})}%
    \def\ekd@munit@delim{%
      \luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getappdelim(\luastringO{\ekdan@type}))}}%
    \luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.limit_bagunits(\luastringO{\ekdan@type}))}%
  \fi%  
  \ifdefined\ekdn@labelb%
    \luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.setnotelab(\luastringO{\ekdn@labelb}))}%
    \ifdefined\ekdn@labele\else\def\ekdn@labele{\ekdn@labelb}\fi%
  \else\PackageError{ekdosis}{missing labelb}{`labelb' must be
    set.}\fi%
  \ifbool{al@rlmode}%
  {\edef\note@contents{%
      % \hskip .75em
      \ifekd@mapps
        \ifbool{subsq@unit@\ekdan@type}%
        {\ekd@munit@delim}{}%
      \else%
        \ifsubsq@unit\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekd@unit@delim}\fi%
      \fi%
      \current@ref@arg{\ekdn@labelb}{\ekdn@labele}%\hskip .25em
      \ifdefined\ekdn@lem%
          {\textdir TRT\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdn@lem}}%
          \unless\ifekdn@nosep
          \unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdn@sep}\fi
          \else\fi%
            {\textdir TRT\unexpanded{#2}}}}%
  {\edef\note@contents{%
      % \hskip .75em
      \ifekd@mapps
        \ifbool{subsq@unit@\ekdan@type}%
        {\ekd@munit@delim}{}%
      \else%
        \ifsubsq@unit\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekd@unit@delim}\fi%
      \fi%
      \current@ref@arg{\ekdn@labelb}{\ekdn@labele}%\hskip .25em
      \ifdefined\ekdn@lem
        \ltx@ifpackageloaded{babel}%
          {\noexpand\selectlanguage{\languagename}%
            \unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdn@lem}}%
          {\unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdn@lem}}%
          \unless\ifekdn@nosep
          \unexpanded\expandafter{\ekdn@sep}\fi
          \else\fi%
          \ltx@ifpackageloaded{babel}%
          {{\noexpand\selectlanguage{\languagename}\unexpanded{#2}}}{%
            {\unexpanded{#2}}}}}%
  \ifekd@mapps%
  \unconditional@appin[\ekdan@type]{\note@contents}%
  \else%
  \unconditional@appin{\note@contents}%
  \fi%
    \luadirect{ekdosis.setprevnotelab(\luastringO{\ekdn@labelb})}%
  \egroup
  \subsq@unittrue
  \ignorespaces
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define keys to be used by the optional argument of \cs{note} when
% this command is found inside \cs{app}:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ekvdefinekeys{ekd@note}{
  store pre = \pre@value,
  store post = \post@value
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The following three commands, \cs{note@app}, \cs{ekd@note} and
% \cs{ekd@note@star} are used internally when a \cs{note} command is
% found inside \cs{app}. These commands are used to insert short
% comments after the lemma text or after any variant reading in the
% apparatus criticus. \cs{note@app} and subsequently \cs{ekd@note} and
% \cs{ekd@note@star} accept the optional key-value arguments just
% defined above.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\ekd@note}{O{} m}{%
  \bgroup%
  \ekvset{ekd@note}{#1}%
  \edef\note@contents{%
    \ekvifdefinedNoVal{note}{pre}{}{%
      \unexpanded\expandafter{\pre@value}}%
    {\unexpanded{#2}}%
    \ekvifdefinedNoVal{note}{post}{}{%
      \unexpanded\expandafter{\post@value}}%
  }%
  \append@app{\note@contents}%
  \egroup%
}
\NewDocumentCommand{\ekd@note@star}{O{} m}{%
  \if@pkg@parnotes
    \bgroup%
      \ekvset{ekd@note}{#1}%
      \edef\note@contents{%
        \ekvifdefinedNoVal{note}{pre}{}{%
          \unexpanded\expandafter{\pre@value}}%
        \unskip\noexpand\parnote{\unexpanded{#2}}%
        \ekvifdefinedNoVal{note}{post}{}{%
          \unexpanded\expandafter{\post@value}}%
      }%
      \append@app{\note@contents}%
    \egroup%
  \else
    \append@app{\unskip\footnote{#2}}%
  \fi%
}
\NewDocumentCommand{\note@app}{s O{} +m}{%
  \ifbool{al@rlmode}{%
    \IfBooleanTF{#1}{\ekd@note@star[#2]{%
          {\textdir TRT#3}}}
    {\ekd@note[#2]{{\textdir TRT#3}}}%
  }{%
    \IfBooleanTF{#1}{\ekd@note@star[#2]{#3}}
    {\ekd@note[#2]{#3}}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\note}
% Finally, \cs{note} is a simple command designed to check whether
% \cs{note} itself is called inside or outside \cs{app}. Then, unless
% it is found inside \cs{lem}, it calls \cs{note@app} in the former
% case and \cs{note@noapp} in the latter case:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\note}{s O{} +m}{%
  \ifekd@state%
    \ifekd@isinapp%
      \ifekd@isinlem%
        \note@noapp[#2]{#3}%
      \else%
        \IfBooleanTF{#1}{\note@app*[#2]{#3}}{\note@app[#2]{#3}}%
      \fi%
    \else%
      \note@noapp[#2]{#3}%
      \fi%
  \fi%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \cs{apparatus} is used internally by \pkg{ekdosis} to print the
% apparatus at the bottom of pages. Therefore, it is not documented,
% but this may change in the future for it will be possible to have
% apparatuses printed at other places.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\apparatus}{}{%
  \luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.appout())}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The following two commands call \textsf{Lua} functions to check
% whether an apparatus should be printed on a given page and to store
% the current column id.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\test@apparatus}{}{%
  \luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.testapparatus())}}
\NewDocumentCommand{\ekd@storecol}{}{%
  \luadirect{ekdosis.storecurcol(\luastring{\thecolumn})}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Start and stop |ekdosis|:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\EkdosisOn}{}{%
  \ekd@statetrue}
\NewDocumentCommand{\EkdosisOff}{}{%
  \ekd@statefalse%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Neutralize unwanted commands provided by \pkg{lineno} within the
% \env{ekdosis} environment:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\ekd@setlineno{%
  \let\setpagewiselinenumbers\relax%
  \let\pagewiselinenumbers\relax%
  \let\endpagewiselinenumbers\relax%
  \let\runningpagewiselinenumbers\relax%
  \let\realpagewiselinenumbers\relax%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{environment}{ekdosis}
% Finally comes the \env{ekdosis} environment meant to receive the
% edition text equipped with an apparatus criticus. This environment
% collects its contents and delivers it to \textsf{Lua} functions if a
% \texttt{TEI xml} output file be desired.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentEnvironment{ekdosis}{+b}{%
  \ekd@setlineno%
  \runninglinenumbers
    \EkdosisOn#1}{%
    \EkdosisOff
  \endrunninglinenumbers%
  \iftei@export
  \luadirect{ekdosis.exporttei(\luastringN{\par #1\par })}\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% \paragraph{Alignment} What follows is to arrange texts in parallel
% columns either on single pages or on facing pages.
%
% Define keys to be used by the \env{alignment} environment:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ekvdefinekeys{ekd@align}{
  store tcols = \tcols@num,
  store lcols = \lcols@num,
  store texts = \texts@value,
  store apparatus = \apparatus@value,
  bool paired = \ifekd@paired,
  choice lineation = {page = \ekd@pagelineationtrue,
                      document = \ekd@pagelineationfalse},
  unknown-choice lineation = \PackageError{ekdosis}{unknown
    lineation=#1}{`lineation' must be either `page' or `document'.},
  choice segmentation = {auto = \def\segmentation@val{auto},
                         noauto = \def\segmentation@val{noauto}},
  unknown-choice segmentation = \PackageError{ekdosis}{unknown
    segmentation=#1}{`segmentation' must be either `auto' or
    `noauto'.},
  bool flush = \ifekd@flushapp,
  initial tcols = 2,
  initial lcols = 1,
  initial texts = edition;translation,
  initial apparatus = edition,
  default segmentation = auto
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\SetAlignment}
% \cs{SetAlignment}\marg{settings} can be used either in the
% preamble or at any point of the document to set or modify the
% keys-value settings just defined above.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\SetAlignment}{m}{
  \ekvset{ekd@align}{#1}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Patch \pkg{paracol} to insert a hook in \cs{pcol@nextpage}. This
% hook is used to reset line numbers on new pages.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\patchcmd{\pcol@nextpage}{%
  \endgroup}{%
  \ifekd@pagelineation\resetlinenumber\fi
  \endgroup}{}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{EkdosisColStart} and \cs{EkdosisColStop} initialize columns
% meant to receive edition texts. These commands are used internally
% by \pkg{ekdosis}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\EkdosisColStart}{}{%
  \ekd@setlineno%
  \runninglinenumbers
  \ekd@storecol%
  \stepcounter{ekd@lab}%
  \zlabel{ekd:\theekd@lab}%
  \luadirect{%
    ekdosis.storeabspg(\luastring{\zref@extract{ekd:\theekd@lab}{abspage}},
    "pg_i")}%
  \ifekd@pagelineation
    \luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.checkresetlineno())}
  \fi
}
\NewDocumentCommand{\EkdosisColStop}{}{%
  \stepcounter{ekd@lab}%
  \zlabel{ekd:\theekd@lab}%
  \luadirect{%
    ekdosis.storeabspg(\luastring{\zref@extract{ekd:\theekd@lab}{abspage}},
    "pg_ii")}%
  \endrunninglinenumbers%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{environment}{alignment}
% \cs{begin}|{alignment}|\oarg{options}\dots\cs{end}|{alignment}| can
% be used as it is provided to typeset a standard critical edition
% text on the left-hand pages accompanied with a translation on the
% right-hand pages. To that effect, it provides by default two new
% environments, \env{edition} and \env{translation}, to be used to
% typeset both texts. (Either whole texts or texts entered by
% paragraphs alternately.) The optional argument of \env{alignment}
% accepts the exact same key-value options as \cs{SetAlignment}
% described above. One may contrast these options with those accepted
% by \cs{SetAlignment} as \enquote{local settings}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentEnvironment{alignment}{O{}}
{%
  \ekvset{ekd@align}{#1}%
  \luadirect{ekdosis.mkenvdata(
    \luastring{\texts@value},
    "texts"
    )}
  \ifekd@flushapp
    \luadirect{ekdosis.newalignment("set")}
  \fi
  \luadirect{ekdosis.mkenvdata(
    \luastring{\apparatus@value}, "apparatus"
    )}
  \setrunninglinenumbers
  \luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.mkenv())}
  \ifekd@paired
  \begin{paracol}[\lcols@num]{\tcols@num}
  \else
  \begin{paracol}[\lcols@num]*{\tcols@num}
  \fi
  }
  {\end{paracol}
  \iftei@export\luadirect{ekdosis.export_coldata_totei()}\fi
  \ifekd@flushapp
    \luadirect{ekdosis.newalignment("reset")}
  \fi
  \luadirect{ekdosis.flushenvdata()}
  \luadirect{ekdosis.flushcolnums()}
  }
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% \paragraph{Divisions of the Body}
% \pkg{ekdosis} can convert \cs{book}, \cs{part}, \cs{chapter},
% \cs{section}, \cs{subsec{\allowbreak}tion} and \cs{subsubsection}
% into corresponding \texttt{TEI} \enquote*{numbered}
% |<div|\textsubscript{\emph{n}}|>| elements, where $1\leq n\leq 6$.
% \begin{macro}{\MkBodyDivs}
% \cs{MkBodyDivs} is used to let \pkg{ekdosis} know which sectional
% commands are actually being used in an edition text. This command
% takes six mandatory arguments. For example, if \cs{section} and
% \cs{subsection} are the only sectional commands being used,
% |\MkBodyDivs{section}{subsection}{}{}{}{}| will have \cs{section}
% and \cs{subsection} converted into |<div1>| and |<div2>|
% respectively.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\MkBodyDivs}{mmmmmm}{
  \luadirect{ekdosis.mkdivdepths(
    \luastringN{#1},
    \luastringN{#2},
    \luastringN{#3},
    \luastringN{#4},
    \luastringN{#5},
    \luastringN{#6}
    )
  }
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Divisions specific to \pkg{ekdosis}. Define keys to be used by
% \cs{ekddiv}:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ekvdefinekeys{ekd@div}{
  code type = \def\type@value{#1},
  code n = \def\n@value{#1},
  code head = \def\head@value{#1},
  code barehead = \def\barehead@value{#1},
  store depth = \depth@value,
  choice toc = {book = \def\toc@value{book},
                part = \def\toc@value{part},
                chapter = \def\toc@value{chapter},
                section = \def\toc@value{section},
                subsection = \def\toc@value{subsection},
                subsubsection = \def\toc@value{subsubsection},
                paragraph = \def\toc@value{paragraph},
                subparagraph = \def\toc@value{subparagraph}},
  unknown-choice toc = \PackageError{ekdosis}{unknown toc=#1}{`toc'
    must be either `book', `part', `chapter', `section', `subsection',
    \MessageBreak `subsubsection', `paragraph' or `subparagraph'.},
  initial depth = 1
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\FormatDiv}
% \cs{FormatDiv}\marg{n}\marg{code before}\marg{code
% after} is used to lay out the heading of the title. It takes three
% mandatory arguments: \emph{n}, namely the number referring to the
% particular depth of the division, and then some \LaTeX{} formatting
% commands to go before and after the heading itself:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\FormatDiv}{m m m}{
  \luadirect{ekdosis.fmtdiv(\luastring{#1},
    \luastringN{#2},
    \luastringN{#3})}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \cs{ekd@getfmtdiv} gets the formatting commands that have been
% stored by \cs{FormatDiv}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\ekd@getfmtdiv}{m m}{%
  \luadirect{tex.sprint(ekdosis.getfmtdiv(\luastringO{#1},
    \luastringN{#2}))}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\ekddiv}
% \cs{ekddiv}\marg{key-value arguments} is the standard command
% provided by \pkg{ekdosis} to meet the requirements of classical and
% literary texts the divisions of which depend on many different
% received traditions. It takes one mandatory argument in which the
% key-value arguments defined above are accepted, and converts the
% divisions into \texttt{TEI} \enquote*{un-numbered} |<div>|
% elements.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentCommand{\ekddiv}{m}{
  \begingroup
  \ekvset{ekd@div}{#1}%
  \ifdefined\head@value
    \bgroup
      \ekd@getfmtdiv{\depth@value}{b}%
      \head@value
      \ekd@getfmtdiv{\depth@value}{e}%
    \egroup
      \ifdefined\toc@value
        \ltx@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{\phantomsection}{}%
          \ifdefined\barehead@value
            \addcontentsline{toc}{\toc@value}{\barehead@value}%
          \else
            \addcontentsline{toc}{\toc@value}{\head@value}%
          \fi
      \fi
  \fi
  \endgroup
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% A very basic and provisional implementation of poetry lines
% follows:---
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\ekdverseindentlength}
\setlength{\ekdverseindentlength}{\parindent}
\newenvironment*{ekdverse}[1][\ekdverseindentlength]{
  \begin{list}{}{%
      \setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}
      \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}
      \setlength{\topsep}{0pt}
      \setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}
    }
  \item[]
  }{\end{list}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{environment}{ekdpar}
%   When |autopar| is set to |false| by means of \cs{SetTEIxmlExport},
%   \env{ekdpar}\---or any other environment set to be inserted within
%   |<p>| elements\---must be used so that \pkg{ekdosis} can be
%   informed of paragraph boundaries.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentEnvironment{ekdpar}{}{\par}{\par}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \iffalse
%</package>
% \fi
% 
% \Finale
% \iffalse
%<*lua>
% \fi
% \begin{comment}
% \begin{ekdlua}
-- `'
-- This table will hold the functions:
ekdosis = {}

-- lpeg equivalent for string.gsub()
local function gsub(s, patt, repl)
  patt = lpeg.P(patt)
  patt = lpeg.Cs((patt / repl + 1)^0)
  return lpeg.match(patt, s)
end

-- some basic patterns:
local letters = lpeg.R("az", "AZ")
local ascii = lpeg.R("az", "AZ", "@@")
local dblbkslash = lpeg.Cs("\\")
local bsqbrackets = lpeg.Cs{ "[" * ((1 - lpeg.S"[]") + lpeg.V(1))^0 * "]" }
local bcbraces = lpeg.Cs{ "{" * ((1 - lpeg.S"{}") + lpeg.V(1))^0 * "}" }
local spce = lpeg.Cs(" ")
local spcenc = lpeg.P(" ")
local cmdstar = lpeg.Cs(spce * lpeg.P("*"))
local bsqbracketsii = lpeg.Cs(bsqbrackets^-2)
local bcbracesii = lpeg.Cs(bcbraces^-2)
local cmd = lpeg.Cs(dblbkslash * ascii^1 * cmdstar^-1)
local rawcmd = lpeg.Cs(dblbkslash * ascii^1)
local aftercmd = lpeg.Cs(lpeg.S("*[{,.?;:'`\"") + dblbkslash)
local cmdargs = lpeg.Cs(spce^-1 * bsqbracketsii * bcbracesii * bsqbrackets^-1)
local app = lpeg.Cs("app")
local lemrdg = lpeg.Cs(lpeg.Cs("lem") + lpeg.Cs("rdg"))
local note = lpeg.Cs("note")
local lnbrk = lpeg.Cs("\\\\")
local poemline = lpeg.Cs(lnbrk * bsqbrackets^-1)
local endpoem = lpeg.Cs(lnbrk * lpeg.S("*!") * bsqbrackets^-1)
local sections = lpeg.Cs(lpeg.P("book") + lpeg.P("part") + lpeg.P("chapter")
			    + lpeg.P("section") + lpeg.P("subsection")
			    + lpeg.P("subsubsection"))
local par =  lpeg.P(lpeg.P("\\par") * spce^0)
local parb = lpeg.P(lpeg.Cs("\\p@rb") * spce^0)
local para = lpeg.P(lpeg.Cs("\\p@ra") * spce^0)
local labelrefcmds = lpeg.Cs(lpeg.P("label")
			       + lpeg.P("linelabel")
			       + lpeg.P("lineref")
			       + lpeg.P("ref")
			       + lpeg.P("pageref")
			       + lpeg.P("vref")
			       + lpeg.P("vpageref"))
local citecmds = lpeg.Cs(lpeg.P("icite")
			    + lpeg.P("cite")
			    + lpeg.P("Cite")
			    + lpeg.P("cite *")
			    + lpeg.P("parencite")
			    + lpeg.P("Parencite")
			    + lpeg.P("parencite *")
			    + lpeg.P("footcite")
			    + lpeg.P("footcitetext")
			    + lpeg.P("textcite")
			    + lpeg.P("Textcite")
			    + lpeg.P("smartcite")
			    + lpeg.P("Smartcite")
			    + lpeg.P("autocite")
			    + lpeg.P("Autocite")
			    + lpeg.P("autocite *")
			    + lpeg.P("Autocite *")
)
--
-- Bind to local variables
local next = next

-- General
xmlids = {}

local function xmlidfound(element)
   for i = 1,#xmlids do
      if xmlids[i].xmlid == element then
	 return true
      end
   end
   return false
end

local function checkxmlid(str)
   if string.find(str, "^[0-9]")
      or string.find(str, "[:; ]")
   then
      return false
   else
      return true
   end
end

-- Witnesses
listWit = {}
idsRend = {}
shorthands = {}

local function isfound(table, value)
   for i = 1,#table do
      if table[i] == value then
	 return true
      end
   end
   return false
end

local function isintable(table, value)
   for i = 1,#table do
      if table[i].a == value then
	 return true
      end
   end
   return false
end

local function get_a_index(id, table)
   local idfound = nil
   for i = 1,#table
   do
      if table[i].a == id then
	 idfound = i
	 break
      end
   end
   return idfound
end

local function getindex(id, table)
   local idfound = nil
   for i = 1,#table
   do
      if table[i].xmlid == id then
	 idfound = i
	 break
      end
   end
   return idfound
end

function ekdosis.newwitness(id,
			    siglum,
			    description,
			    Settlement,
			    Institution,
			    Repository,
			    Collection,
			    Idno,
			    MsName,
			    OrigDate)
   if xmlidfound(id)
   then
      tex.print("\\unexpanded{\\PackageWarning{ekdosis}{\""
      	 ..id..
      	 "\" already exists as an xml:id. "
      	 ..
      	 "Please pick another id.}}")
   elseif not checkxmlid(id)
   then
      tex.print("\\unexpanded{\\PackageWarning{ekdosis}{\""
      	 ..id..
      	 "\" is not a valid xml:id. \\MessageBreak "
      	 ..
      	 "Please pick another id.}}")
   else
      table.insert(xmlids, {xmlid = id})
      table.sort(xmlids, function(a ,b) return(#a.xmlid > #b.xmlid) end)
      table.insert(idsRend, {xmlid = id, abbr = siglum})
      table.sort(idsRend, function(a ,b) return(#a.xmlid > #b.xmlid) end)
      table.insert(listWit, {xmlid = id,
			     abbr = siglum,
			     detailsDesc = description,
			     msIdentifier = {
				settlement = Settlement,
				institution = Institution,
				repository = Repository,
				collection = Collection,
				idno = Idno,
				msName = MsName}
                             })
      local indexwit = getindex(id, listWit)
      if OrigDate ~= "" then
	 listWit[indexwit].history = {}
	 listWit[indexwit].history.origin = {origDate = OrigDate}
      end
   end
   return true
end

function ekdosis.newhand(id, witid, siglum, description)
   if xmlidfound(id) or not xmlidfound(witid)
   then
      tex.print("\\unexpanded{\\PackageWarning{ekdosis}{\""
      	 ..id..
      	 "\" already exists as an xml:id. "
      	 ..
      	 "Please pick another id.}}")
   elseif not checkxmlid(id)
   then
      tex.print("\\unexpanded{\\PackageWarning{ekdosis}{\""
      	 ..id..
      	 "\" is not a valid xml:id. \\MessageBreak "
      	 ..
      	 "Please pick another id.}}")
   else
      table.insert(xmlids, {xmlid = id})
      table.sort(xmlids, function(a ,b) return(#a.xmlid > #b.xmlid) end)
      table.insert(idsRend, {xmlid = id, abbr = siglum})
      table.sort(idsRend, function(a ,b) return(#a.xmlid > #b.xmlid) end)
      local indexwit = getindex(witid, listWit)
      -- listWit[indexwit].handDesc = {xmlid = id, abbr = siglum, handNote = description}
      if listWit[indexwit].handDesc == nil
      then
	 listWit[indexwit].handDesc = {}
      else
      end
      table.insert(listWit[indexwit].handDesc,
		   {xmlid = id, abbr = siglum, detailsDesc = description})
   end
   return true
end

function ekdosis.newshorthand(id, rend, xmlids)
   if isintable(shorthands, id)
   then
      tex.print("\\unexpanded{\\PackageWarning{ekdosis}{\""
      	 ..id..
      	 "\" already exists as a shorthand. "
      	 ..
      	 "Please pick another shorthand.}}")
   else
      table.insert(shorthands, { a = id, b = rend, c = xmlids })
      table.sort(shorthands, function(a ,b) return(#a.a > #b.a) end)
      table.insert(idsRend, {xmlid = id, abbr = rend})
      table.sort(idsRend, function(a ,b) return(#a.xmlid > #b.xmlid) end)
   end
   return true
end

local xmlbibresource = nil

function ekdosis.setxmlbibresource(str)
   xmlbibresource = str..".xml"
   return true
end

function ekdosis.newscholar(id, siglum)
   if xmlidfound(id)
   then
      tex.print("\\unexpanded{\\PackageWarning{ekdosis}{\""
	    ..id..
	    "\" already exists as an xml:id. " 
	    ..
	    "Please pick another id.}}")
   elseif not checkxmlid(id)
   then
      tex.print("\\unexpanded{\\PackageWarning{ekdosis}{\""
      	 ..id..
      	 "\" is not a valid xml:id. \\MessageBreak "
      	 ..
      	 "Please pick another id.}}")
   else
      table.insert(xmlids, {xmlid = id})
      table.sort(xmlids, function(a ,b) return(#a.xmlid > #b.xmlid) end)
      table.insert(idsRend, {xmlid = id, abbr = siglum})
      table.sort(idsRend, function(a ,b) return(#a.xmlid > #b.xmlid) end)
   end
   return true
end

function ekdosis.getsiglum(str, opt)
   str = str..","
   str = string.gsub(str, "%s-(%,)", "%1")
   ctrl = str
   if opt == "tei" then
      for i = 1,#shorthands do
	 str = string.gsub(str, shorthands[i].a, shorthands[i].c)
      end
      for i = 1,#idsRend do
	 str  = string.gsub(str, "(%f[%w])"..idsRend[i].xmlid.."(%,)",
			    "%1#"..idsRend[i].xmlid.."%2")
	 ctrl = string.gsub(ctrl, idsRend[i].xmlid.."%,", "")
      end
      str = string.gsub(str, "%,(%s-)([%#])", " %2")
      str = string.gsub(str, "%,$", "")
   else
      for i = 1,#idsRend do
	 str  = string.gsub(str, idsRend[i].xmlid.."%,", idsRend[i].abbr)
	 ctrl = string.gsub(ctrl, idsRend[i].xmlid.."%,", "")
      end
   end
   -- if string.find(ctrl, "[A-Za-z0-9]")
   if string.find(ctrl, "%S")
   then
      return "<??>"
   else
      return str
   end
end

-- begin totei functions

local cmdtotags = {
   {a="textsuperscript", b="hi", c=" rend=\"sup\""},
   {a="textsubscript", b="hi", c=" rend=\"sub\""},
   {a="LRfootnote", b="note", c=" place=\"bottom\""},
   {a="RLfootnote", b="note", c=" place=\"bottom\""},
   {a="enquote *", b="quote", c=""},
   {a="footnote", b="note", c=" place=\"bottom\""},
   {a="enquote", b="quote", c=""},
   {a="txtrans", b="s", c=" xml:lang=\"ar-Latn\" type=\"transliterated\""},
   {a="textbf", b="hi", c=" rend=\"bold\""},
   {a="textit", b="hi", c=" rend=\"italic\""},
   {a="textsc", b="hi", c=" rend=\"smallcaps\""},
   {a="textsf", b="hi", c=" rend=\"sf\""},
   {a="arbup", b="hi", c=" rend=\"sup\""},
   {a="txarb", b="s", c=" xml:lang=\"arb\""},
   {a="mbox", b="", c=""},
   {a="arb", b="foreign",
    c=" xml:lang=\"ar-Latn\" type=\"transliterated\" subtype=\"arabtex\""}
}

local texpatttotags = {
   {a="\\pagebreak%s+%[[1-4]%]", b=""},
   {a="\\pagebreak%s+", b=""},
   {a="\\altrfont%s+", b=""},
   {a="\\LR%s+{(.-)}", b="%1"},
   {a="\\RL%s+{(.-)}", b="%1"}
}

local envtotags = {
   {a="flushright", b="p", c=" rend=\"align(right)\""},
   {a="flushleft", b="p", c=" rend=\"align(left)\""},
   {a="quotation", b="quote", c=""},
   {a="ekdverse", b="lg", c=""},
   {a="txarabtr", b="p", c=" xml:lang=\"ar-Latn\" type=\"transliterated\""},
   {a="quoting", b="quote", c=""},
   {a="ekdpar", b="p", c=""},
   {a="txarab", b="p", c=" xml:lang=\"arb\""},
   {a="center", b="p", c=" rend=\"align(center)\""},
   {a="verse", b="lg", c=""},
   {a="arab", b="p",
    c=" xml:lang=\"ar-Latn\" type=\"transliterated\" subtype=\"arabtex\""}
}

local close_p = {
   "p",
   "lg"
}

local forbid_xmlid = true

function ekdosis.newcmdtotag(cmd, tag, attr)
   if forbid_xmlid
   then
      attr = string.gsub(attr, "xml:id", "n") -- xml:id is not allowed here
   else
   end
   if isintable(cmdtotags, cmd)
   then
      local index = get_a_index(cmd, cmdtotags)
      table.remove(cmdtotags, index)
      table.insert(cmdtotags, {a = cmd, b = tag, c = " "..attr})
      table.sort(cmdtotags, function(a ,b) return(#a.a > #b.a) end)
   else
      table.insert(cmdtotags, {a = cmd, b = tag, c = " "..attr})
      table.sort(cmdtotags, function(a ,b) return(#a.a > #b.a) end)
   end
   return true
end

function ekdosis.newpatttotag(pat, repl)
   pat = string.gsub(pat, "([%[%]])", "%%%1")
   pat = string.gsub(pat, "%#[1-9]", "(.-)")
   repl = string.gsub(repl, "%#([1-9])", "%%%1")
   table.insert(texpatttotags, { a = pat, b = repl })
   table.sort(texpatttotags, function(a ,b) return(#a.a > #b.a) end)
   return true
end

function ekdosis.newenvtotag(env, tag, attr, closep)
   if forbid_xmlid
   then
      attr = string.gsub(attr, "xml:id", "n") -- xml:id is not allowed here
   else
   end
   if isintable(envtotags, env)
   then
      local index = get_a_index(env, envtotags)
      table.remove(envtotags, index)
      table.insert(envtotags, {a = env, b = tag, c = " "..attr, d = closep})
      table.sort(envtotags, function(a ,b) return(#a.a > #b.a) end)
   else
      table.insert(envtotags, {a = env, b = tag, c = " "..attr, d = closep})
      table.sort(envtotags, function(a ,b) return(#a.a > #b.a) end)
   end
   return true
end

-- Get values of attributes
local function get_attr_value(str, attr)
   str = str..","
   local attrval = string.match(str, "%f[%w]"..attr.."%s?%=%s?%b{}")
      or string.match(str, "%f[%w]"..attr.."%s?%=%s?.-%,")
      or ""
   attrval = string.gsub(attrval, attr.."%s?%=%s?(%b{})", function(bbraces)
			    bbraces = string.sub(bbraces, 2, -2)
			    return string.format("%s", bbraces)
   end)
   attrval = string.gsub(attrval, attr.."%s?%=%s?(.-)%s?%,", "%1")
   return attrval
end

local function xml_entities(str)
   str = string.gsub(str, "%<", "&lt;")
   str = string.gsub(str, "%>", "&gt;")
   return str
end

local function note_totei(str)
   str = gsub(str,
	      dblbkslash *
		 note *
		 spcenc^-1 *
		 bsqbrackets *
		 bcbraces *
		 spcenc^-1,
	      function(bkslash, cmd, opt, arg)
		 opt = string.sub(opt, 2, -2)
		 arg = string.sub(arg, 2, -2)
		 teitype = get_attr_value(opt, "type")
		 if teitype ~= "" then teitype = " type=\""..teitype.."\"" else end
		 right = get_attr_value(opt, "labelb")
		 left = get_attr_value(opt, "labele")
		 if left ~= ""
		 then
		    return string.format(
		       "<%s%s target=\"#range(right(%s),left(%s))\">%s</%s><anchor xml:id=\"%s\"/>",
		       cmd, teitype, right, left, arg, cmd, right)
		 elseif left == ""
		 then
		    return string.format(
		       "<%s%s target=\"#right(%s)\">%s</%s><anchor xml:id=\"%s\"/>",
		       cmd, teitype, right, arg, cmd, right)
		 end
   end)
   return str
end

local function app_totei(str)
   str = gsub(str,
	      dblbkslash *
		 app *
		 spcenc^-1 *
		 bsqbrackets *
		 bcbraces *
		 spcenc^-1,
	      function(bkslash, cmd, opt, arg)
		 opt = string.sub(opt, 2, -2)
		 arg = string.sub(arg, 2, -2)
		 opt = get_attr_value(opt, "type")
		 if opt ~= "" then opt = " type=\""..opt.."\"" else end
		 return app_totei(string.format("<%s%s>%s</%s>",
						cmd, opt, arg, cmd))
   end)
   return str
end

local function lem_rdg_totei(str)
   str = gsub(str,
	      spcenc^-1 *
		 dblbkslash *
		 lemrdg *
		 spcenc^-1 *
		 bsqbrackets *
		 bcbraces *
		 spcenc^-1,
	      function(bkslash, cmd, opt, arg)
		 opt = string.sub(opt, 2, -2)
		 arg = string.sub(arg, 2, -2)
		 -- opt = get_attr_value(opt, "wit")
		 --
		 teiwit = get_attr_value(opt, "wit")
		 if teiwit ~= "" then teiwit = " wit=\""..ekdosis.getsiglum(teiwit, "tei").."\"" else end
		 teitype = get_attr_value(opt, "type")
		 if teitype ~= "" then teitype = " type=\""..teitype.."\"" else end
		 --
		 if opt == ""
		 then
		    return lem_rdg_totei(string.format("<%s>%s</%s>",
						       cmd, arg, cmd))
		 else
		    -- opt = ekdosis.getsiglum(opt, "tei")
		    return lem_rdg_totei(string.format("<%s%s%s>%s</%s>",
						       cmd, teiwit, teitype, arg, cmd))
		 end
   end)
   str = gsub(str, spcenc^-0 * dblbkslash * lemrdg * spcenc^-1 * bcbraces * spcenc^-1,
	      function(bkslash, cmd, arg)
		 arg = string.sub(arg, 2, -2)
		 return lem_rdg_totei(string.format("<%s>%s</%s>", cmd, arg, cmd))
   end)
   return str
end

local function relocate_notes(str)
   str = string.gsub(str, "(%<lem.-%>.-)(%<note.->.-%<%/note%>)(.-%<%/lem%>)", "%1%3%2")
   return str
end

local function linestotei(str)
--   str = "\n<l>"..str
   str = string.gsub(str, "^%s?(.-)%s?$", "\n<l>%1</l>\n")
--   str = gsub(str, endpoem, "</l>\n")
   str = gsub(str, poemline * spcenc^-1 * lpeg.P("&gt;"), "\n<lb/>")
   str = gsub(str, poemline * spcenc^-1, "</l>\n<l>")
--   str = str.."</l>\n"
   return str
end

-- better use lpeg: look into this later
local function versetotei(str)
   str = string.gsub(str, "(\\begin%s?%{ekdverse%})(%b[])(.-)(\\end%s?%{ekdverse%})", function(benv, opt, arg, eenv)
			arg = linestotei(arg)
			return string.format("%s%s%s%s", benv, opt, arg, eenv)
   end)
   str = string.gsub(str, "(\\begin%s?%{ekdverse%})(.-)(\\end%s?%{ekdverse%})", function(benv, arg, eenv)
			arg = linestotei(arg)
			return string.format("%s%s%s", benv, arg, eenv)
   end)
   str = string.gsub(str, "(\\begin%s?%{verse%})(%b[])(.-)(\\end%s?%{verse%})", function(benv, opt, arg, eenv)
			arg = linestotei(arg)
			return string.format("%s%s%s%s", benv, opt, arg, eenv)
   end)
   str = string.gsub(str, "(\\begin%s?%{verse%})(.-)(\\end%s?%{verse%})", function(benv, arg, eenv)
			arg = linestotei(arg)
			return string.format("%s%s%s", benv, arg, eenv)
   end)
   return str
end

local function envtotei(str)
   for i = 1,#envtotags
   do
      if envtotags[i].b ~= ""
      then
	 if isfound(close_p, envtotags[i].b) or envtotags[i].d == "yes"
	 then
	    str = gsub(str, lpeg.P("\\begin") * spcenc^-1 * lpeg.P("{")
			  * lpeg.Cs(envtotags[i].a) * lpeg.P("}")
			  * bsqbracketsii * bcbracesii * spcenc^-1,
		       "\\p@rb <"..envtotags[i].b..envtotags[i].c..">")
	    str = gsub(str, spcenc^-1 * lpeg.P("\\end") * spcenc^-1 * lpeg.P("{")
			  * lpeg.Cs(envtotags[i].a) * lpeg.P("}"),
		       "</"..envtotags[i].b..">\\p@ra ")
	 else
	    str = gsub(str, lpeg.P("\\begin") * spcenc^-1 * lpeg.P("{")
			  * lpeg.Cs(envtotags[i].a) * lpeg.P("}")
			  * bsqbracketsii * bcbracesii * spcenc^-1,
		       "<"..envtotags[i].b..envtotags[i].c..">")
	    str = gsub(str, spcenc^-1 * lpeg.P("\\end") * spcenc^-1 * lpeg.P("{")
			  * lpeg.Cs(envtotags[i].a) * lpeg.P("}"),
		       "</"..envtotags[i].b..">")
	 end
      else
	 str = gsub(str, lpeg.P("\\begin") * spcenc^-1 * lpeg.P("{")
		       * lpeg.Cs(envtotags[i].a) * lpeg.P("}")
		       * bsqbracketsii * bcbracesii * spcenc^-1,
		    "")
	 str = gsub(str, spcenc^-1 * lpeg.P("\\end") * spcenc^-1 * lpeg.P("{")
		       * lpeg.Cs(envtotags[i].a) * lpeg.P("}"),
		    "")
      end
   end
   str = gsub(str, lpeg.P("\\begin") * spcenc^-1 * lpeg.P("{")
		 * lpeg.Cs(ascii^1) * lpeg.P("}") * bsqbracketsii
		 * bcbracesii * spcenc^-1,
	      "<%1>")
   str = gsub(str, spcenc^-1 * lpeg.P("\\end") * spcenc^-1 * lpeg.P("{")
		 * lpeg.Cs(ascii^1) * lpeg.P("}") * bsqbracketsii
		 * bcbracesii,
	      "</%1>")
   return str
end

local function texpatttotei(str)
   for i = 1,#texpatttotags do
      str = string.gsub(str, texpatttotags[i].a, texpatttotags[i].b)
   end
   return str
end

local function icitetotei(str)
   str = gsub(str, lpeg.P("\\")
		 * citecmds
		 * spcenc^-1
		 * bsqbrackets
		 * bsqbrackets
		 * bcbraces
		 * bsqbrackets^-1,
	      function(cmd, pre, post, body, opt)
		 pre = string.sub(pre, 2, -2)
		 post = string.sub(post, 2, -2)
		 body = string.sub(body, 2, -2)
		 if not checkxmlid(body)
		 then
		    tex.print("\\unexpanded{\\PackageWarning{ekdosis}{\""
				 ..body..
				 "\" is not a valid xml:id. \\MessageBreak "
				 ..
				 "Please pick another id.}}")
		 else
		 end
		 return string.format("%s <ref target=\"#%s\">%s</ref>", pre, body, post)
   end)
   str = gsub(str, lpeg.P("\\")
		 * citecmds
		 * spcenc^-1
		 * bsqbrackets
		 * bcbraces
		 * bsqbrackets^-1,
	      function(cmd, post, body, opt)
		 post = string.sub(post, 2, -2)
		 body = string.sub(body, 2, -2)
		 if not checkxmlid(body)
		 then
		    tex.print("\\unexpanded{\\PackageWarning{ekdosis}{\""
				 ..body..
				 "\" is not a valid xml:id. \\MessageBreak "
				 ..
				 "Please pick another id.}}")
		 else
		 end
		 return string.format("<ref target=\"#%s\">%s</ref>", body, post)
   end)
   str = gsub(str, lpeg.P("\\")
		 * citecmds
		 * spcenc^-1
		 * bcbraces
		 * bsqbrackets^-1,
	      function(cmd, body, opt)
		 body = string.sub(body, 2, -2)
		 if not checkxmlid(body)
		 then
		    tex.print("\\unexpanded{\\PackageWarning{ekdosis}{\""
				 ..body..
				 "\" is not a valid xml:id. \\MessageBreak "
				 ..
				 "Please pick another id.}}")
		 else
		 end
		 return string.format("<ptr target=\"#%s\"/>", body)
   end)
   return str
end

local function cmdtotei(str)
   for i = 1,#cmdtotags
   do
      str = gsub(str, lpeg.P("\\") * lpeg.Cs(cmdtotags[i].a) * spcenc^-1 * bsqbrackets * -bcbraces, "\\%1%2{}")
      str = gsub(str, lpeg.P("\\") * lpeg.Cs(cmdtotags[i].a) * spcenc^-1 * -(bsqbrackets + bcbraces), "\\%1[]{}")
      str = string.gsub(str, "(\\"..cmdtotags[i].a..")%s?%*?(%b{})", "%1[]%2")
      str = string.gsub(str, "(\\"..cmdtotags[i].a..")%s?%*?(%b[])(%b{})",
			function(cmd, arg, body)
			   body = string.sub(body, 2, -2)
			   arg = string.sub(arg, 2, -2)
			   arg = string.gsub(arg, "(%b{})", function(braces)
						braces = string.sub(braces, 2, -2)
						return string.format("\"%s\"", braces)
			   end)
			   body = cmdtotei(body)
			   -- return string.format("<"..cmdtotags[i].b..cmdtotags[i].c.." %s>%s</"..cmdtotags[i].b..">", arg, body)
			   if cmdtotags[i].b ~= ""
			   then
			      return string.format("<"..cmdtotags[i].b..cmdtotags[i].c..">%s</" ..
						   cmdtotags[i].b..">", body)
			   else
			      return ""
			   end
      end)
   end
   -- temporarily:
   str = string.gsub(str, "\\(getsiglum)%s?(%b{})",
		     function(cmd, body)
			body = string.sub(body, 2, -2)
			teisiglum = ekdosis.getsiglum(body, "tei")
 			printsiglum = ekdosis.getsiglum(body)
 			-- body = cmdtotei(body)
			return string.format("<ref target=\"%s\">%s</ref>",
					     teisiglum, printsiglum)
   end)
   str = gsub(str, lpeg.P("\\") * labelrefcmds * spcenc^-1 * bcbraces,
	      function(cmd, body)
		 body = string.sub(body, 2, -2)
		 if not checkxmlid(body)
		 then
		    tex.print("\\unexpanded{\\PackageWarning{ekdosis}{\""
				 ..body..
				 "\" is not a valid xml:id. \\MessageBreak "
				 ..
				 "Please pick another id.}}")
		 else
		 end
		 if string.find(cmd, "label")
		 then
		    return string.format("<anchor xml:id=\"%s\"/>", body)
		 else
		    return string.format("<ptr target=\"#%s\"/>", body)
		 end
   end)
   str = string.gsub(str, "\\(%a+)%s?%*?(%b[])(%b{})",
		     function(cmd, opt, body)
			body = string.sub(body, 2, -2)
			body = cmdtotei(body)
			return string.format("<%s>%s</%s>", cmd, body, cmd)
   end)
   str = string.gsub(str, "\\(%a+)%s?%*?(%b{})",
		     function(cmd, body)
			body = string.sub(body, 2, -2)
			body = cmdtotei(body)
			return string.format("<%s>%s</%s>", cmd, body, cmd)
   end)
   str = string.gsub(str, "(%s)(%>)", "%2")
   return str
end

local teiautopar = true

function ekdosis.setteiautopar(choice)
   if choice == "yes"
   then
      teiautopar = true
   else
      teiautopar = false
   end
   return true
end

local function partotei(str)
   if teiautopar
   then
      str = gsub(str, lpeg.P(lpeg.P("\\par") * spcenc^1)^1, "\\par ")
      str = gsub(str, ((para + parb) * par^-1)^2, "\\p@r ")
      str = string.gsub(str, "\\p@ra%s+", "<p>")
      str = string.gsub(str, "\\p@rb%s+", "</p>")
      str = string.gsub(str, "\\p@r%s+", "")   
      str = string.gsub(str, "%s?\\par%s?", "<p>", 1)
      str = string.gsub(str, "(%<p%>)(%s-)(%<%/?div%d?)", "%3")
      str = string.gsub(str, "%s?\\par%s?", "</p><p>")
      str = string.gsub(str, "<p>%s?</p>", "")
      str = string.gsub(str, "(%<p%>)%s?(%</div%>)$", "%2")
      str = string.gsub(str, "(%<p%>)%s?$", "")
      str = string.gsub(str, "(<p>)%s?(<div.->)", "%2%1")
   else
      str = gsub(str, par + para + parb, "")
   end
   return str
end

local function self_close_tags(str)
   str = gsub(str, lpeg.P("<" * -lpeg.S("/"))
		 * lpeg.Cs(letters^1)
		 * lpeg.Cs((1 - lpeg.S"<>")^0)
		 * lpeg.P(">")
		 * lpeg.P("</")
		 * lpeg.Cs(letters^1)
		 * lpeg.P(">"), function(ftag, arg, ltag)
		    if ftag == ltag
		    then
		       return string.format("<%s%s/>", ftag, arg)
		    else
		    end
   end)
   return str
end

local divdepth = {
   book = 1,
   part = 2,
   chapter = 3,
   section = 4,
   subsection = 5,
   subsubsection = 6
}

function ekdosis.mkdivdepths(...)
   divdepth = {}
   local num = 1
   for _, y in ipairs{...}
   do
      if y == "book" or "part" or "chapter"
	 or "section" or "subsection" or "subsubsection"
      then
	 divdepth[y] = num
	 num = num + 1
      else
      end
   end
   return true
end

-- LaTeX side: format the divisions
local fmtdiv = {}

function ekdosis.fmtdiv(n, fmtb, fmte)
   if isintable(fmtdiv, n)
   then
      local index = get_a_index(n, fmtdiv)
      table.remove(fmtdiv, index)
   else
   end
   table.insert(fmtdiv, { a = n, formatb = fmtb, formate = fmte} )
   return true
end

function ekdosis.getfmtdiv(n, pos)
   local index = get_a_index(n, fmtdiv)
   if index ~= nil
   then
      if pos == "b"
      then
	 return fmtdiv[index].formatb
      elseif pos == "e"
      then
	 return fmtdiv[index].formate
      end
   else
      return ""
   end
end

local ekddivs = true

function ekdosis.setekddivsfalse()
   ekddivs = false
end

local function ekddivs_totei(str)
   str = gsub(str, dblbkslash * lpeg.Cs("ekddiv") * spce^-1 * bcbraces,
	      function(bkslash, cmd, space, arg)
		 if ekddivs
		 then
		    arg = string.sub(arg, 2, -2)
		    teitype = get_attr_value(arg, "type")
		    tein = get_attr_value(arg, "n")
		    teihead = get_attr_value(arg, "head")
		    teidepth = get_attr_value(arg, "depth")
		    if teitype ~= "" then teitype = " type=\""..teitype.."\"" else end
		    if tein ~= "" then tein = " n=\""..tein.."\"" else end
		    if teidepth ~= ""
		    then
		       teidepth = " depth=\""..teidepth.."\""
		    else
		       teidepth = " depth=\"1\""
		    end
		    return string.format("\\p@rb <div%s%s%s><head>%s</head>\\p@ra ",
					 teitype, tein, teidepth, teihead)
		 else
		    return ""
		 end
   end)
   return str
end

local function section_totei(str)
   str = gsub(str, dblbkslash * sections * spce^-1 * bcbraces, "%1%2%3[]%4")
   str = gsub(str, dblbkslash * sections * spce^-1 * bsqbrackets * bcbraces,
	      function(bkslash, secname, space, opt, arg)
		 if ekddivs
		 then
		    return ""
		 else
		    ctr = divdepth[secname]
		    arg = string.sub(arg, 2, -2)
		    return string.format("\\p@rb <div%s type=\"%s\"><head>%s</head>\\p@ra ",
					 ctr, secname, arg)
		 end
   end)
   return str
end

local used_ndivs = {}

local function close_ekddivs_at_end(str)
   local isdiv = false
   if string.find(str, "</div>$")
   then
      isdiv = true
      str = string.gsub(str, "(.*)(</div>)$", "%1")
   else
   end
   -- collect used depth numbers
   for i in string.gmatch(str, "<div .-depth%=\"%d\".->")
   do
      i = string.match(i, "depth=\"%d\"")
      i = string.match(i, "%d")
      if isintable(used_ndivs, i)
      then
      else
	 table.insert(used_ndivs, {a = i} )
      end
   end
   if next(used_ndivs) ~= nil
   then
      table.sort(used_ndivs, function(a ,b) return(#a.a > #b.a) end)
   else
   end
   local firstdiv = string.match(str, "<div .-depth%=\"%d\".->") or ""
   firstdiv = string.match(firstdiv, "depth%=\"%d\"") or ""
   firstdiv = string.match(firstdiv, "%d") or ""
   local lastdiv = string.match(string.reverse(str), ">.-\"%d\"%=htped.- vid<") or ""
   lastdiv = string.match(lastdiv, "\"%d\"%=htped") or ""
   lastdiv = string.match(lastdiv, "%d") or ""
   local firstdivindex = get_a_index(firstdiv, used_ndivs)
   local lastdivindex = get_a_index(lastdiv, used_ndivs)
   firstdivindex = tonumber(firstdivindex)
   lastdivindex = tonumber(lastdivindex)
   local closedivs = ""
   if isintable(used_ndivs, firstdiv)
   then
      while lastdivindex >= firstdivindex
      do
	 closedivs = closedivs.."</div>"
	 lastdivindex = lastdivindex - 1
      end
   end
   if isdiv
   then
      return str..closedivs.."</div>"
   else
      return str..closedivs
   end
end

local function close_ndivs_at_end(str)
   local isdiv = false
   if string.find(str, "</div>$")
   then
      isdiv = true
      str = string.gsub(str, "(.*)(</div>)$", "%1")
   else
   end
   -- collect used div numbers
   for i in string.gmatch(str, "<div[1-6]")
   do
      i = string.match(i, "[1-6]")
      if isintable(used_ndivs, i)
      then
      else
   	 table.insert(used_ndivs, {a = i} )
      end
   end
   if next(used_ndivs) ~= nil
   then
      table.sort(used_ndivs, function(a ,b) return(#a.a > #b.a) end)
   else
   end
   local firstdiv = string.match(str, "<div[1-6]") or ""
   firstdiv = string.match(firstdiv, "[1-6]") or ""
   local lastdiv = string.match(string.reverse(str), "[1-6]vid<") or ""
   lastdiv = string.match(lastdiv, "[1-6]") or ""
   local firstdivindex = get_a_index(firstdiv, used_ndivs)
   local lastdivindex = get_a_index(lastdiv, used_ndivs)
   firstdivindex = tonumber(firstdivindex)
   lastdivindex = tonumber(lastdivindex)
   local closedivs = ""
   if isintable(used_ndivs, firstdiv)
   then
      while lastdivindex >= firstdivindex
      do
	 closedivs = closedivs.."</div"..used_ndivs[lastdivindex].a..">"
	 lastdivindex = lastdivindex - 1
      end
   end
   if isdiv
   then
      return str..closedivs.."</div>"
   else
      return str..closedivs
   end
end

local function close_ekddivs_in_between(str)
   local maxdepth = 1
   for i in string.gmatch(str, "<div.-depth=\"(%d)\".->", "%1")
   do
      if tonumber(i) > tonumber(maxdepth)
      then
	 maxdepth = i
      else
      end
   end
   for ndivi = 1, maxdepth
   do
      str = string.gsub(str, "(<div .-depth%=\")("..ndivi..")(\".->)(.-)(<div .-depth%=\")(%d)(\".->)",
			function(bdivi, ndivi, edivi, between, bdivii, ndivii, edivii)
			   local firstdiv = ndivi
			   local lastdiv = ndivii
			   local firstdivindex = get_a_index(firstdiv, used_ndivs)
			   local lastdivindex = get_a_index(lastdiv, used_ndivs)
			   firstdivindex = tonumber(firstdivindex)
			   lastdivindex = tonumber(lastdivindex)
			   local closedivs = ""
			   if firstdivindex >= lastdivindex
			   then
			      while firstdivindex >= lastdivindex
			      do
				 closedivs = closedivs.."</div>"
				 firstdivindex = firstdivindex - 1
			      end
			   end
			   return string.format("%s%s%s%s%s%s%s%s",
						bdivi, ndivi, edivi, between, closedivs, bdivii, ndivii, edivii)
      end)
   end
   str = string.gsub(str, "(<div.-)(%sdepth%=\"%d\")(.->)", "%1%3")
   used_ndivs = {}
   return str
end

local function close_ndivs_in_between(str)
   for ndivi = 1, 6
   do
      str = string.gsub(str, "(<div)("..ndivi..")(.->)(.-)(<div)([1-6])(.->)",
			function(bdivi, ndivi, edivi, between, bdivii, ndivii, edivii)
			   local firstdiv = ndivi
			   local lastdiv = ndivii
			   local firstdivindex = get_a_index(firstdiv, used_ndivs)
			   local lastdivindex = get_a_index(lastdiv, used_ndivs)
			   firstdivindex = tonumber(firstdivindex)
			   lastdivindex = tonumber(lastdivindex)
			   local closedivs = ""
			   if firstdivindex >= lastdivindex
			   then
			      while firstdivindex >= lastdivindex
			      do
			   	 closedivs = closedivs.."</div"..used_ndivs[firstdivindex].a..">"
			   	 firstdivindex = firstdivindex - 1
			      end
			   end
			   return string.format("%s%s%s%s%s%s%s%s",
						bdivi, ndivi, edivi, between, closedivs, bdivii, ndivii, edivii)
			
   end)
   end
   used_ndivs = {}
   return str
end

local function textotei(str)
   str = xml_entities(str)
   str = texpatttotei(str)
   str = note_totei(str)
   str = app_totei(str)
   str = lem_rdg_totei(str)
   str = relocate_notes(str)
   str = versetotei(str)
   str = envtotei(str)
   str = ekddivs_totei(str)
   str = section_totei(str)
   str = icitetotei(str)
   str = cmdtotei(str)
   str = self_close_tags(str)
   str = partotei(str)
   if ekddivs
   then
      str = close_ekddivs_at_end(str)
      str = close_ekddivs_in_between(str)
   else
      str = close_ndivs_at_end(str)
      str = close_ndivs_in_between(str)
   end
   return str
end

local teifilename = tex.jobname.."-tei"

function ekdosis.setteifilename(str)
   teifilename = str
   return true
end

function ekdosis.openteistream()
   local f = io.open(teifilename.."_tmp.xml", "a+")
   f:write('<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>', "\n")
   f:write("<TEI xmlns=\"http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0\">", "\n")
   f:write("<teiHeader>", "\n")
   f:write("<fileDesc>", "\n")
   f:write("<titleStmt>", "\n")
   f:write("<title><!-- Title --></title>", "\n")
   f:write("<respStmt>", "\n")
   f:write("<resp><!-- Edited by --></resp>", "\n")
   f:write("<name><!-- Name --></name>", "\n")
   f:write("</respStmt>", "\n")
   f:write("</titleStmt>", "\n")
   f:write("<publicationStmt>", "\n")
   f:write("<distributor><!-- Distributor name  --></distributor>", "\n")
   f:write("</publicationStmt>", "\n")
   f:write("<sourceDesc>", "\n")
   f:write("<listWit>", "\n")
   for i = 1,#listWit do
      f:write('<witness xml:id=\"', listWit[i].xmlid, "\">", "\n")
      f:write('<abbr type="siglum">', textotei(listWit[i].abbr), "</abbr>", "\n")
      f:write(textotei(listWit[i].detailsDesc), "\n")
      f:write("<msDesc>", "\n")
      if listWit[i].msIdentifier.settlement == ""
	 and listWit[i].msIdentifier.institution == ""
	 and listWit[i].msIdentifier.repository == ""
	 and listWit[i].msIdentifier.collection == ""
	 and listWit[i].msIdentifier.idno == ""
	 and listWit[i].msIdentifier.msName == ""
      then
	 f:write("<msIdentifier/>", "\n")
      else
	 f:write("<msIdentifier>", "\n")
	 if listWit[i].msIdentifier.settlement ~= "" then
	    f:write("<settlement>", textotei(listWit[i].msIdentifier.settlement), "</settlement>", "\n")
	 else end
	 if listWit[i].msIdentifier.institution ~= "" then
	    f:write("<institution>", textotei(listWit[i].msIdentifier.institution), "</institution>", "\n")
	 else end
	 if listWit[i].msIdentifier.repository ~= "" then
	    f:write("<repository>", textotei(listWit[i].msIdentifier.repository), "</repository>", "\n")
	 else end
	 if listWit[i].msIdentifier.collection ~= "" then
	    f:write("<collection>", textotei(listWit[i].msIdentifier.collection), "</collection>", "\n")
	 else end
	 if listWit[i].msIdentifier.idno ~= "" then
	    f:write("<idno>", textotei(listWit[i].msIdentifier.idno), "</idno>", "\n")
	 else end
	 if listWit[i].msIdentifier.msName ~= "" then
	    f:write("<msName>", textotei(listWit[i].msIdentifier.msName), "</msName>", "\n")
	 else end
	 f:write("</msIdentifier>", "\n")
      end
      if listWit[i].handDesc ~= nil then
	 f:write("<physDesc>", "\n")
	 f:write("<handDesc hands=\"", #listWit[i].handDesc, "\">", "\n")
	 local j = 1
	 while listWit[i].handDesc[j]
	 do
	    f:write("<handNote xml:id=\"", listWit[i].handDesc[j].xmlid, "\">", "\n")
	    f:write('<abbr type="siglum">', textotei(listWit[i].handDesc[j].abbr), "</abbr>", "\n")
	    f:write("<p>", textotei(listWit[i].handDesc[j].detailsDesc), "</p>", "\n")
	    f:write("</handNote>", "\n")
	    j = j + 1
	 end
	 f:write("</handDesc>", "\n")
	 f:write("</physDesc>", "\n")
      else end
      if listWit[i].history ~= nil then
	 f:write("<history>", "\n")
	 f:write("<origin>", "\n")
	 f:write("<origDate>", textotei(listWit[i].history.origin.origDate), "</origDate>", "\n")
	 f:write("</origin>", "\n")
	 f:write("</history>", "\n")
      end
      f:write("</msDesc>", "\n")
      f:write("</witness>", "\n")
   end
   f:write("</listWit>", "\n")
   f:write("</sourceDesc>", "\n")
   f:write("</fileDesc>", "\n")
   f:write("<encodingDesc>", "\n")
   f:write('<variantEncoding method="parallel-segmentation" location="internal"/>', "\n")
   f:write("</encodingDesc>", "\n")
   f:write("</teiHeader>", "\n")
   f:write("<text>", "\n")
   f:write("<body>", "\n")
   f:close()
   return true
end

local tidy = nil

local function cleanup_tei()
   local f = assert(io.open(teifilename.."_tmp.xml", "r"))
   t = f:read("*a")
   t = string.gsub(t, "%<p%>%s?%</p%>", "")
   t = string.gsub(t, "^\n", "")
   f:close()
   local fw = assert(io.open(teifilename.."_tmp.xml", "w"))
   fw:write(t)
   fw:close()
   return true
end

function ekdosis.closeteistream(opt)
   local f = io.open(teifilename.."_tmp.xml", "a+")
   f:write("\n", "</body>", "\n")
   if xmlbibresource ~= nil then
      bibf = assert(io.open(xmlbibresource, "r"))
      t = bibf:read("*a")
      t = string.gsub(t, "%s+corresp%=%b\"\"", "")
      t = string.gsub(t, "\n\n", "\n")
      f:write("<back>", "\n")
      f:write("<listBibl>", "\n")
      for i in string.gmatch(t, "<biblStruct.->.-</biblStruct>")
      do
	 f:write(i, "\n")
      end
      f:write("</listBibl>", "\n")
      f:write("</back>", "\n")
      bibf:close()
   else
   end
   f:write("</text>", "\n")
   f:write("</TEI>", "\n")
   f:close()
   cleanup_tei()
   os.remove(teifilename..".xml")
   os.rename(teifilename.."_tmp.xml", teifilename..".xml")
   if opt == "tidy" then
      os.execute("tidy -qmi -xml --output-xml yes "..teifilename..".xml")
   else
   end
   return true
end

function ekdosis.exporttei(str)
   local f = io.open(teifilename.."_tmp.xml", "a+")
   -- f:write("\n<p>")
   str = textotei(str)
   f:write(str)
   f:close()
   return true
end
-- end totei functions

-- begin basic TeX Conspectus siglorum
function ekdosis.basic_cs(msid)
   local indexwit = getindex(msid, listWit)
   siglum = listWit[indexwit].abbr
   -- if listWit[indexwit].detailsDesc == ""
   -- then
   -- name = listWit[indexwit].msIdentifier.msName
   -- else
   --    name = listWit[indexwit].msIdentifier.msName
   -- 	 .."\\thinspace\\newline\\bgroup\\footnotesize{}"..
   -- 	 listWit[indexwit].detailsDesc
   -- 	 .."\\egroup{}"
   -- end
   name = listWit[indexwit].detailsDesc
   if listWit[indexwit].history ~= nil
      and
      listWit[indexwit].history.origin ~= nil
   then
      date = listWit[indexwit].history.origin.origDate
   else
      date = ""
   end
   return siglum.."&"..name.."&"..date
end
-- end basic TeX Conspectus siglorum

function ekdosis.removesp(str)
   str = gsub(str, cmd * cmdargs * spcenc^-1, "%1%2")
   return str
end

function ekdosis.closestream()
   os.remove(tex.jobname..".ekd")
   os.rename(tex.jobname.."_tmp.ekd", tex.jobname..".ekd")
   return true
end

local cur_abs_pg = 0
local pg_i = nil
local pg_ii = nil
local prevcol = nil
local curcol = "x"

local check_resetlineno = {}

function ekdosis.update_abspg(n) -- not used
   cur_abs_pg = n
   return true
end

function ekdosis.storeabspg(n, pg)
   if pg == "pg_i" then
      pg_i = n
   elseif pg == "pg_ii" then
      pg_ii = n
      table.insert(check_resetlineno, curcol.."-"..pg_ii)
   end
   cur_abs_pg = n
   return true
end

function ekdosis.checkresetlineno()
   if isfound(check_resetlineno, curcol.."-"..pg_i)
   then
      return ""
   else
      return "\\resetlinenumber"
   end
end

--
-- Build environments to be aligned
--

local cur_alignment = "-"
local cur_alignment_patt = "%-"
local cur_alignment_cnt = 1

local newalignment = false
function ekdosis.newalignment(str)
   if str == "set"
   then
      newalignment = true
      cur_alignment = "-"..cur_alignment_cnt.."-"
      cur_alignment_patt = "%-"..cur_alignment_cnt.."%-"
      cur_alignment_cnt = cur_alignment_cnt + 1
   elseif str == "reset"
   then
      newalignment = false
      cur_alignment = "-"
      cur_alignment_patt = "%-"
   end
   return true
end

local aligned_texts = {}
local texts_w_apparatus = {}
local coldata_totei = {}

local function sanitize_envdata(str)  -- look for a better way to achieve this
   str = string.gsub(str, "(%a+)%s+(%b[])", "%1%2")
   str = string.gsub(str, "(%a+)(%b[])%s+", "%1%2")
   str = string.gsub(str, "%s+(%a+)(%b[])", "%1%2")
   str = gsub(str, lpeg.Cs(letters^1)
		 * spcenc^-1
		 * -bsqbrackets
		 * lpeg.Cs(";"), "%1[]%2")
   str = string.gsub(str, "%s+(%a+)(%b[])", "%1%2")
   return str
end

function ekdosis.mkenvdata(str, opt)
   if not string.find(str, "%;", -1) then str = str .. ";" else end
   --   str = str ..";"
   --   str = string.gsub(str, "%s+", "")
   local fieldstart = 1
   local col = 0
   if opt == "texts" then
      str = sanitize_envdata(str)
      repeat
	 local _s, nexti = string.find(str, "%b[]%s-%;", fieldstart)
	 local namediv = string.gsub(string.sub(str, fieldstart, nexti-1), "(%a+)%s-(%b[])", "%1")
	 local attr = string.gsub(string.sub(str, fieldstart, nexti-1), "(%a+)%s-(%b[])", "%2")
	 attr = string.sub(attr, 2, -2)
	 if forbid_xmlid
	 then
	    attr = string.gsub(attr, "xml:id", "n") -- xml:id is not allowed here
	 else
	 end
	 table.insert(aligned_texts, { text = namediv,
				       attribute = attr,
				       column = col })
	 table.insert(coldata_totei, { environment = namediv,
				       data = {} })
	 col = col + 1
	 fieldstart = nexti + 1
      until fieldstart > string.len(str)
      return aligned_texts
   elseif opt == "apparatus" then
      repeat
	 local nexti = string.find(str, "%;", fieldstart)
	 table.insert(texts_w_apparatus, string.sub(str, fieldstart, nexti-1))
	 fieldstart = nexti +1
      until fieldstart > string.len(str)
      return texts_w_apparatus
   end
end

-- Reminder: the following two variables are already set above
-- local prevcol = nil
-- local curcol = "x"

function ekdosis.storecurcol(n)
      curcol = n
   return true
end

function ekdosis.flushcolnums()
   prevcol = nil
   curcol = "x"
   return true
end

function ekdosis.flushenvdata()
   aligned_texts = {}
   texts_w_apparatus = {}
   coldata_totei = {}
   return true
end

function ekdosis.storecoldata(nthcol, chunk)
   local tindex = tonumber(nthcol) + 1
   table.insert(coldata_totei[tindex].data, chunk)
   return true
end

local environment_div = {}

local function build_envdiv(str)
   if not environment_div[str]
   then
      environment_div[str] = 1
   else
      environment_div[str] = environment_div[str] + 1
   end
   local div = "div-"..str.."_"..environment_div[str]
   if xmlidfound(div)
   then
      tex.print("\\unexpanded{\\PackageWarning{ekdosis}{\""
		   ..div..
		   "\" already exists as an xml:id. " 
		   ..
		   "ekdosis has generated some random id.}}")
      return "div-"..math.random(1000,9999)
   elseif not checkxmlid(div)
   then
      tex.print("\\unexpanded{\\PackageWarning{ekdosis}{\""
      	 ..div..
      	 "\" is not a valid xml:id. \\MessageBreak "
      	 ..
      	 "Please pick another id.}}")
   else
      table.insert(xmlids, {xmlid = div})
      table.sort(xmlids, function(a ,b) return(#a.xmlid > #b.xmlid) end)
      return div
   end
end

function ekdosis.mkenv()
   local environments = {}
   for i = 1,#aligned_texts
   do
      if isfound(texts_w_apparatus, aligned_texts[i].text)
      then
	 table.insert(environments, "\\NewDocumentEnvironment{".. aligned_texts[i].text.."}{+b}"
			 .."{\\begin{nthcolumn}{".. aligned_texts[i].column.."}"
			 .."\\par"
			 .."\\EkdosisColStart"
			 .."\\EkdosisOn#1"
		         .."}{\\EkdosisOff"
			 .."\\EkdosisColStop"
		         .."\\end{nthcolumn}"
			 .."\\csname iftei@export\\endcsname\\luadirect{ekdosis.storecoldata("
			 .. aligned_texts[i].column
			 ..", \\luastringN{\\par#1\\par})}\\fi"
			 .."}")
	 table.insert(environments, "\\NewDocumentEnvironment{".. aligned_texts[i].text.."*}{+b}"
			 .."{\\begin{nthcolumn*}{".. aligned_texts[i].column.."}[]"
			 .."\\par"
			 .."\\EkdosisColStart"
			 .."\\EkdosisOn#1"
		         .."}{\\EkdosisOff"
			 .."\\EkdosisColStop"
		         .."\\end{nthcolumn*}"
			 .."\\csname iftei@export\\endcsname\\luadirect{ekdosis.storecoldata("
			 .. aligned_texts[i].column
			 ..", \\luastringN{\\par#1\\par})}\\fi"
			 .."}")
      else
	 table.insert(environments, "\\NewDocumentEnvironment{".. aligned_texts[i].text.."}{+b}"
			 .."{\\begin{nthcolumn}{".. aligned_texts[i].column.."}"
			 .."\\par"
			 .."#1"
		         .."}{\\end{nthcolumn}"
			 .."\\csname iftei@export\\endcsname\\luadirect{ekdosis.storecoldata("
			 .. aligned_texts[i].column
			 ..", \\luastringN{\\par#1\\par})}\\fi"
			 .."}")
	 table.insert(environments, "\\NewDocumentEnvironment{".. aligned_texts[i].text.."*}{+b}"
			 .."{\\begin{nthcolumn*}{"..aligned_texts[i].column.."}[]"
			 .."\\par"
			 .."#1"
			 .."}{"
		         .."\\end{nthcolumn*}"
			 .."\\csname iftei@export\\endcsname\\luadirect{ekdosis.storecoldata("
			 .. aligned_texts[i].column
			 ..", \\luastringN{\\par#1\\par})}\\fi"
			 .."}")
      end
      forbid_xmlid = false
      if aligned_texts[i].attribute ~= ""
      then
	 ekdosis.newenvtotag(aligned_texts[i].text, "div",
			     "xml:id=\""
				..build_envdiv(aligned_texts[i].text)
				.."\" "
				..aligned_texts[i].attribute)
      else
	 ekdosis.newenvtotag(aligned_texts[i].text, "div",
			     "xml:id=\""
				..build_envdiv(aligned_texts[i].text)
				.."\"")
      end
      forbid_xmlid = true
   end
   str = table.concat(environments)
   return str
end

function ekdosis.export_coldata_totei()
   for i = 1,#coldata_totei
   do
      ekdosis.exporttei("\\begin{".. coldata_totei[i].environment .."}"
			   .. table.concat(coldata_totei[i].data)
			.. "\\end{".. coldata_totei[i].environment .."}")
   end
end

-- handle multiple layers in apparatuses
--
local apparatuses = {}
local bagunits = {}

function ekdosis.newapparatus(teitype,
			      appdir,
			      apprule,
			      appdelim,
			      appsep,
			      appbhook,
			      appehook,
			      applimit)
   if isintable(apparatuses, teitype)
   then
      tex.print("\\unexpanded{\\PackageWarning{ekdosis}{\""
		   ..teitype..
		   "\" already exists.}}")
   else
      table.insert(apparatuses, {a = teitype,
				 direction = appdir,
				 rule = apprule,
				 delim = appdelim,
				 sep = appsep,
				 bhook = appbhook,
				 ehook = appehook,
				 limit = applimit})
   end
   bagunits[teitype] = 1
   return true
end

function ekdosis.getappdelim(str)
   for i = 1,#apparatuses
   do
      if apparatuses[i].a == str then
	 delimfound = apparatuses[i].delim
	 break
      end
   end
   return delimfound
end

function ekdosis.get_bagunits(teitype)
   return bagunits[teitype]
end

local function getapplimit(str)
   for i = 1,#apparatuses
   do
      if apparatuses[i].a == str then
	 limitfound = apparatuses[i].limit
	 break
      end
   end
   if tonumber(limitfound) ~= nil
   then
      if tonumber(limitfound) < 10
      then
	 return 0
      else
	 return limitfound
      end
   else
      return 0
   end
end

function ekdosis.limit_bagunits(teitype)
   local limit = tonumber(getapplimit(teitype))
   if limit >= 10 and bagunits[teitype] > limit
   then
      bagunits[teitype] = 2
      return "\\pagebreak"
   else
      return ""
   end
end

function ekdosis.increment_bagunits(teitype)
   bagunits[teitype] = (bagunits[teitype] or 0) + 1
end

local function reset_bagunits()
   for i = 1,#apparatuses
   do
      bagunits[apparatuses[i].a] = 1
   end
end

function ekdosis.appin(str, teitype)
   local f = io.open(tex.jobname.."_tmp.ekd", "a+")
   if next(apparatuses) == nil
   then
      f:write("<", cur_abs_pg, cur_alignment, curcol, "-0>", str, "</",
	      cur_abs_pg, cur_alignment, curcol, "-0>\n")
   else
      for i = 1,#apparatuses
      do
	 if apparatuses[i].a == teitype then
	    appno = i
	    break
	 end
      end
      f:write("<", cur_abs_pg, cur_alignment, curcol, "-",
	      appno, ">", str, "</", cur_abs_pg, cur_alignment, curcol, "-", appno, ">\n")
   end
   f:close()
   return true
end

function ekdosis.appout()
   local file = io.open(tex.jobname..".ekd", "r")
   if file ~= nil then io.close(file)
      f = assert(io.open(tex.jobname..".ekd", "r"))
      t = f:read("*a")
      local output = {}
      if next(apparatuses) == nil then
	 -- table.insert(output, "BEGIN")
	 table.insert(output, "\\noindent\\csname ekd@default@rule\\endcsname\\NLS")
	 table.insert(output, "\\csname ekd@begin@apparatus\\endcsname\\ignorespaces")
--	 table.insert(output, "\\noindent ")
	 for i in string.gmatch(t,
				"<"..cur_abs_pg
				   ..cur_alignment_patt
				   ..curcol.."%-0>.-</"
				   ..cur_abs_pg
				   ..cur_alignment_patt
				   ..curcol.."%-0>")
	 do
	    table.insert(output, i)
	 end
	 -- table.insert(output, "END")
      else
	 local n = 1
	 while apparatuses[n]
	 do
	    if string.match(t, "<"..cur_abs_pg
			       ..cur_alignment_patt
			       ..curcol.."%-"..n..">.-</"
			       ..cur_abs_pg
			       ..cur_alignment_patt
			       ..curcol.."%-"..n..">")
	    then
	       -- table.insert(output, "BEGIN")
	       table.insert(output, "\\bgroup{}")
	       if apparatuses[n].direction == "LR"
	       then
		  table.insert(output, "\\pardir TLT\\textdir TLT{}")
	       elseif apparatuses[n].direction == "RL"
	       then
		  table.insert(output, "\\pardir TRT\\textdir TRT{}")
	       end
	       if apparatuses[n].rule == "none"
	       then
		  if n > 1
		  then
		     table.insert(output, "\\NLS{}")
		  else
		     table.insert(output, "\\noindent ")
		  end
	       elseif apparatuses[n].rule ~= ""
	       then
		  if n > 1
		  then
		     table.insert(output, "\\NLS{}" .. apparatuses[n].rule .. "\\NLS{}")
		  else
--		     table.insert(output, "\\noindent ")
		     table.insert(output, apparatuses[n].rule .. "\\NLS{}")
		  end
	       else
		  if n > 1
		  then
		     table.insert(output, "\\NLS\\csname ekd@default@rule\\endcsname\\NLS{}")
		  else
--		     table.insert(output, "\\noindent ")
		     table.insert(output, "\\csname ekd@default@rule\\endcsname\\NLS{}")
		  end
	       end
	       if apparatuses[n].sep ~= ""
	       then
		  table.insert(output, "\\edef\\ekdsep{" .. apparatuses[n].sep .. "}")
	       else
	       end
	       if apparatuses[n].bhook ~= ""
	       then
		  table.insert(output, apparatuses[n].bhook)
	       else
		  table.insert(output, "\\relax")
	       end
	       for i in string.gmatch(t,
				      "<"..cur_abs_pg
					 ..cur_alignment_patt
					 ..curcol.."%-"..n..">.-</"
					 ..cur_abs_pg
					 ..cur_alignment_patt
					 ..curcol.."%-"..n..">")
	       do
		  table.insert(output, i)
	       end
	       if apparatuses[n].ehook ~= ""
	       then
		  table.insert(output, apparatuses[n].ehook)
	       else
	       end
	       table.insert(output, "\\egroup{}")
	       -- table.insert(output, "END")
	    end
	    n = n + 1
	 end
      end
      f:close()
      str = table.concat(output)
      str = string.gsub(str, "</"..cur_abs_pg..cur_alignment_patt..curcol.."%-[0-9]>", "")
      str = string.gsub(str, "<"..cur_abs_pg..cur_alignment_patt..curcol.."%-[0-9]>", " ")
      return str
   else
   end
end

function ekdosis.appin_out(str, nl)
   local f = io.open(tex.jobname.."_tmp.ekd", "a+")
   if nl == "yes" then
      f:write(str, "\n")
   else
      f:write(str)
   end
   f:close()
   return true
end

local curcol_curabspg = {}

function ekdosis.testapparatus()
   if isfound(curcol_curabspg, curcol.."-"..cur_abs_pg)
   then
      if newalignment
      then
	 if next(apparatuses) ~= nil then
	    reset_bagunits()
	 end
	 newalignment = false
	 return "\\booltrue{do@app}"
      else
	 return "\\boolfalse{do@app}"
      end
   else
      table.insert(curcol_curabspg, curcol.."-"..cur_abs_pg)
      if next(apparatuses) ~= nil then
	 reset_bagunits()
      end
      newalignment = false
      return "\\booltrue{do@app}"
   end
end

local function get_ln_prefix(x, y)
   for index = 1, string.len(x)
   do
      if string.sub(x, index, index) ~= string.sub(y, index, index)
      then
	 return string.sub(x, 1, index - 1)
      end
   end
end

function ekdosis.numrange(x, y)
  xstr = tostring(x)
  ystr = tostring(y)
  if x == y -- which will never apply
  then
     return "\\LRnum{" .. xstr .. "}"
  elseif string.len(xstr) ~= string.len(ystr)
  then
     return "\\LRnum{" .. xstr .. "}--\\LRnum{" .. ystr .. "}"
  else
    common = get_ln_prefix(xstr, ystr)
    if string.len(common) == 0
    then
       return "\\LRnum{" .. xstr .. "}--\\LRnum{" .. ystr .. "}"
    elseif string.sub(xstr, -2, -2) == "1"
    then
       return "\\LRnum{"
	  .. string.sub(common, 1, -2)
	  .. string.sub(xstr, string.len(common), -1)
	  .. "}--\\LRnum{"
	  .. string.sub(ystr, string.len(common), -1)
	  .. "}"
    else
       return "\\LRnum{"
	  .. string.sub(common, 1, -1)
	  .. string.sub(xstr, string.len(common) + 1, -1)
	  .. "}--\\LRnum{"
	  .. string.sub(ystr, string.len(common) + 1, -1)
	  .. "}"
    end
  end
end

local lnlabs = {}
local lnlab_salt = 0
local current_lnlab = nil
local prev_lnlab = nil
local current_notelab = nil
local prev_notelab = nil
local current_lemma = nil
local salt = 0

local function mdvisintable(table, value)
   for _, v in pairs(table) do
      if v == value then return true end
   end
   return false
end

function ekdosis.dolnlab(str)
   prev_lnlab = current_lnlab
   current_lemma = str
   i = md5.sumhexa(str)
   if not mdvisintable(lnlabs, i) then
      table.insert(lnlabs, i)
   else
      i = i..salt
      table.insert(lnlabs, i)
      salt = salt + 1
   end
   current_lnlab = i
   return true
end

function ekdosis.getlnlab()
   return current_lnlab
end

function ekdosis.getprevlnlab()
   return prev_lnlab
end

function ekdosis.setnotelab(str)
   current_notelab = str
   return "\\linelabel{" .. current_notelab .. "}"
end

function ekdosis.getnotelab()
   return current_notelab
end

function ekdosis.setprevnotelab(str)
   prev_notelab = str
   return true
end

function ekdosis.getprevnotelab()
   return prev_notelab
end

local function remove_note(str)
   str = gsub(str, dblbkslash * lpeg.P("note") * cmdargs, "")
   return str
end

function ekdosis.mdvappend(str, teitype)
   if teitype == nil
   then
   return "\\linelabel{" .. current_lnlab .. "-b}\\wordboundary{}"
      ..
      current_lemma
      ..
      "\\linelabel{" .. current_lnlab .. "-e}"
      ..
      "\\csname append@app\\endcsname{"
      .. remove_note(str) .. "}"
   else
   return "\\linelabel{" .. current_lnlab .. "-b}\\wordboundary{}"
      ..
      current_lemma
      ..
      "\\linelabel{" .. current_lnlab .. "-e}"
      ..
      "\\csname append@app\\endcsname" .. "[" .. teitype ..  "]{"
      .. remove_note(str) .. "}"
   end
end

% \end{ekdlua}
% \end{comment}
% \iffalse
%</lua>
% \fi
% 
\endinput